Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
c67de8ba | 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2003-05-21 |
6b61353c | 2 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
a933dad1 DL |
3 | See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | ||
5 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
3787e12e | 6 | For older news, see the file ONEWS |
a933dad1 | 7 | |
ad8d610b KS |
8 | Temporary note: |
9 | +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated. | |
10 | --- means no change in the manuals is called for. | |
11 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
1a0b9ae4 | 12 | so we will look at it and add it to the manual. |
ad8d610b | 13 | |
2c311b39 DL |
14 | Fixme: The notes about Emacs 22 are quite incomplete. |
15 | ||
16 | \f | |
17 | * Changes in Emacs 22.1 | |
18 | ||
19 | ** The Emacs character set is now a superset of Unicode. | |
20 | (It has about four times the code space, which should be plenty). | |
21 | ||
22 | The internal encoding used for buffers and strings is now | |
23 | Unicode-based and called `utf-8-emacs'. utf-8-emacs is backwards | |
24 | compatible with the UTF-8 encoding of Unicode. The `emacs-mule' | |
25 | coding system can still read and write data in the old internal | |
26 | encoding. | |
27 | ||
28 | There are still charsets which contain disjoint sets of characters | |
29 | where this is necessary or useful, especially for various Far Eastern | |
30 | sets which are problematic with Unicode. | |
31 | ||
32 | Since the internal encoding is also used by default for byte-compiled | |
33 | files -- i.e. the normal coding system for byte-compiled Lisp files is | |
34 | now utf-8-Emacs -- Lisp containing non-ASCII characters which is | |
35 | compiled by Emacs 22 can't be read by earlier versions of Emacs. | |
36 | Files compiled by Emacs 20 or 21 are loaded correctly as emacs-mule | |
37 | (whether or not they contain multibyte characters), which makes | |
38 | loading them somewhat slower than Emacs 22-compiled files. Thus it | |
39 | may be worth recompiling existing .elc files which don't need to be | |
40 | shared with older Emacsen. | |
41 | ||
42 | ** There are assorted new coding systems/aliases -- see | |
43 | M-x list-coding-systems. | |
44 | ||
45 | ** New charset implementation with many new charsets. | |
46 | See M-x list-character-sets. New charsets can be defined conveniently | |
47 | as tables of unicodes. | |
48 | ||
49 | The dimension of a charset is now 0, 1, 2, or 3, and the size of each | |
50 | dimension is no longer limited to 94 or 96. | |
51 | ||
52 | Generic characters no longer exist. | |
53 | ||
54 | A dynamic charset priority list is used to infer the charset of | |
55 | unicodes for display &c. | |
56 | ||
57 | ** The following facilities are obsolete: | |
58 | ||
59 | Minor modes: unify-8859-on-encoding-mode, unify-8859-on-decoding-mode | |
60 | ||
61 | \f | |
62 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 22.1 | |
63 | ||
90ed648a DL |
64 | map-char-table's behaviour has changed. |
65 | ||
2c311b39 DL |
66 | New functions: characterp, max-char, map-charset-chars, |
67 | define-charset-alias, primary-charset, set-primary-charset, | |
68 | unify-charset, clear-charset-maps, charset-priority-list, | |
69 | set-charset-priority, define-coding-system, | |
90ed648a DL |
70 | define-coding-system-alias, coding-system-aliases, langinfo, |
71 | string-to-multibyte. | |
2c311b39 DL |
72 | |
73 | Changed functions: copy-sequence, decode-char, encode-char, | |
74 | set-fontset-font, new-fontset, modify-syntax-entry, define-charset, | |
75 | modify-category-entry | |
76 | ||
77 | Obsoleted: char-bytes, chars-in-region, set-coding-priority, | |
78 | char-valid-p | |
79 | ||
80 | \f | |
81 | * Incompatible Lisp changes | |
82 | ||
83 | Deleted functions: make-coding-system, register-char-codings, | |
84 | coding-system-spec | |
85 | ||
86 | ** The character codes for characters from the | |
87 | eight-bit-control/eight-bit-graphic charsets aren't now in the range | |
88 | 128-255. | |
05197f40 | 89 | \f |
d278091b | 90 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.4 |
76fb24bb | 91 | |
6b61353c KH |
92 | --- |
93 | ** A Bulgarian translation of the Emacs Tutorial is available. | |
94 | ||
0571f2d8 | 95 | ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk' |
7bea57c9 DL |
96 | when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.0 or newer. This port |
97 | provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats). | |
0571f2d8 | 98 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 99 | --- |
d2a53bb7 PJ |
100 | ** Emacs can now be built without sound support. |
101 | ||
4208da83 SM |
102 | ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code. |
103 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 104 | --- |
76fb24bb PJ |
105 | ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix', |
106 | `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of | |
107 | installed programs. | |
108 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 109 | --- |
81f755ae | 110 | ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game |
672ab90b CW |
111 | scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal |
112 | place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the | |
113 | configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses | |
114 | to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access | |
5167cfda CW |
115 | to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately |
116 | in each user's home directory. | |
81f755ae | 117 | |
cd7d2d9e EZ |
118 | --- |
119 | ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution. | |
120 | You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build | |
121 | Emacs with Leim. | |
122 | ||
4e5cdb4f KS |
123 | +++ |
124 | ** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution. | |
125 | ||
126 | The ELisp reference manual in Info format is built as part of the | |
127 | Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User | |
128 | Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy | |
129 | accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference). | |
130 | ||
131 | --- | |
132 | ** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of | |
133 | the distribution. | |
134 | ||
135 | This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed, | |
136 | together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu | |
137 | item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible | |
138 | (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp). | |
139 | ||
c60ee5e7 JB |
140 | ** Support for Cygwin was added. |
141 | ||
a17b3614 | 142 | --- |
1096bcc0 GM |
143 | ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added. |
144 | ||
84913e36 EZ |
145 | --- |
146 | ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added. | |
147 | ||
82e119fb EZ |
148 | --- |
149 | ** Support for MacOS X was added. | |
150 | See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. | |
151 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 152 | --- |
3fa4ac47 | 153 | ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added. |
16927a56 | 154 | |
d2d70cb6 | 155 | --- |
4e5cdb4f KS |
156 | ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available. |
157 | ||
158 | --- | |
159 | ** A French translation of the Emacs Tutorial is available. | |
6b61353c KH |
160 | ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union |
161 | types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types. | |
4e5cdb4f KS |
162 | |
163 | \f | |
164 | * Changes in Emacs 21.4 | |
d2d70cb6 | 165 | |
6b61353c KH |
166 | ** New command line option -Q. |
167 | ||
168 | This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables | |
169 | the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, the blinking | |
170 | cursor, and the fancy startup screen. | |
171 | ||
172 | ** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for | |
173 | variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available). | |
174 | ||
175 | ** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation | |
176 | before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is | |
177 | supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'. | |
178 | ||
179 | ** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file. | |
180 | If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert | |
181 | mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is | |
182 | displayed at the end of a file buffer in any window, it will stay at | |
183 | the end of the buffer in that window. This allows to tail a file: | |
184 | just put point at the end of the buffer and it will stay there. This | |
185 | rule applies to file buffers. For non-file buffers, the behavior may | |
186 | be mode dependent. | |
187 | ||
188 | ** Auto Revert mode is now more careful to avoid excessive reverts and | |
189 | other potential problems when deciding which non-file buffers to | |
190 | revert. This matters especially if Global Auto Revert mode is enabled | |
191 | and `global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' is non-nil. Auto Revert | |
192 | mode will only revert a non-file buffer if the buffer has a non-nil | |
193 | `revert-buffer-function' and a non-nil `buffer-stale-function', which | |
194 | decides whether the buffer should be reverted. Currently, this means | |
195 | that auto reverting works for Dired buffers (although this may not | |
196 | work properly on all operating systems) and for the Buffer Menu. | |
197 | ||
198 | ** If the new user option `auto-revert-check-vc-info' is non-nil, Auto | |
199 | Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version | |
200 | control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in | |
201 | which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info | |
202 | only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted. | |
203 | ||
204 | ** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file | |
205 | buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to `T' in Buffer Menu | |
206 | mode. | |
207 | ||
208 | ** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable | |
209 | ||
210 | Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are | |
211 | recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of | |
212 | red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error' | |
213 | (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold'). | |
214 | ||
215 | Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes. | |
216 | This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files. | |
217 | This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted. | |
218 | ||
219 | The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If | |
220 | you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a | |
221 | leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a | |
222 | `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks | |
223 | that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are. | |
224 | ||
225 | The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message. | |
226 | ||
227 | ** M-x grep has been adapted to new compile | |
228 | ||
229 | Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers | |
230 | can be saved and will again be loaded with the new `grep-mode'. | |
231 | ||
232 | ** M-x diff uses diff-mode instead of compilation-mode. | |
233 | ||
234 | ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to | |
235 | resync points in both windows. | |
236 | ||
237 | ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'. | |
238 | This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind | |
239 | the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for | |
240 | using strokes as an input method. | |
241 | ||
242 | --- | |
243 | ** The saveplace.el package now filters out unreadable files. | |
244 | When you exit Emacs, the saved positions in visited files no longer | |
245 | include files that aren't readable, e.g. files that don't exist. | |
246 | Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil | |
247 | to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped' | |
248 | and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this | |
249 | feature. | |
250 | ||
251 | ** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine. | |
252 | ||
253 | % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start & | |
254 | % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start & | |
255 | % emacsclient -s foo file1 | |
256 | % emacsclient -s bar file2 | |
257 | ||
258 | ** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window | |
259 | (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into | |
260 | two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line). | |
261 | Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the | |
262 | cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline. | |
263 | ||
264 | The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' may be set to nil to | |
265 | revert to the old behaviour of continuing such lines. | |
266 | ||
267 | ** The buffer boundaries (i.e. first and last line in the buffer) may | |
268 | now be marked with angle bitmaps in the fringes. In addition, up and | |
269 | down arrow bitmaps may be shown at the top and bottom of the left or | |
270 | right fringe if the window can be scrolled in either direction. | |
271 | ||
272 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
273 | `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of | |
274 | this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'. | |
275 | ||
276 | If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are | |
277 | displayed in the left or right fringe, resp. Any other non-nil value | |
278 | causes the bitmap on the top line to be displayed in the left fringe, | |
279 | and the bitmap on the bottom line in the right fringe. | |
280 | ||
281 | If value is a cons (ANGLES . ARROWS), the car specifies the position | |
282 | of the angle bitmaps, and the cdr specifies the position of the arrow | |
283 | bitmaps. | |
284 | ||
285 | For example, (t . right) places the top angle bitmap in left fringe, | |
286 | the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both arrow bitmaps in | |
287 | right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the left fringe, but | |
288 | no arrow bitmaps, use (left . nil). | |
289 | ||
290 | ** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point | |
291 | in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the | |
292 | same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the | |
293 | `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more | |
294 | keyboard oriented alternative. | |
295 | ||
296 | ** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to | |
297 | automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on | |
298 | point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is | |
299 | determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults | |
300 | to one second. This feature is turned off by default. | |
301 | ||
302 | ** New commands `scan-buf-next-region' and `scan-buf-previous-region' | |
303 | move to the start of the next (previous, respectively) region with | |
304 | non-nil help-echo property and display any help found there in the | |
305 | echo area, using `display-local-help'. | |
306 | ||
307 | +++ | |
308 | ** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is | |
309 | preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes | |
310 | hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless | |
311 | preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes | |
312 | hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is | |
313 | enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info | |
314 | anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). | |
315 | ||
316 | ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled. | |
317 | On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455). | |
318 | ||
319 | +++ | |
320 | ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function, | |
321 | now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is | |
322 | an interactively callable function. | |
323 | ||
324 | ||
668c2ab0 JB |
325 | ** sql changes. |
326 | ||
327 | *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlightng of different | |
328 | SQL dialects. This variable can be set globally via Customize, on a | |
329 | buffer-specific basis via local variable settings, or for the current | |
330 | session using the new SQL->Product submenu. (This menu replaces the | |
331 | SQL->Highlighting submenu.) | |
332 | ||
333 | The following values are supported: | |
334 | ||
335 | ansi ANSI Standard (default) | |
336 | db2 DB2 | |
337 | informix Informix | |
338 | ingres Ingres | |
339 | interbase Interbase | |
340 | linter Linter | |
341 | ms Microsoft | |
342 | mysql MySQL | |
343 | oracle Oracle | |
344 | postgres Postgres | |
345 | solid Solid | |
346 | sqlite SQLite | |
347 | sybase Sybase | |
348 | ||
349 | The current product name will be shown on the mode line following the | |
350 | SQL mode indicator. | |
351 | ||
352 | The technique of setting `sql-mode-font-lock-defaults' directly in | |
353 | your .emacs will no longer establish the default highlighting -- Use | |
354 | `sql-product' to accomplish this. | |
355 | ||
356 | *** The function `sql-add-product-keywords' can be used to add | |
357 | font-lock rules to the product specific rules. For example, to have | |
358 | all identifiers ending in "_t" under MS SQLServer treated as a type, | |
359 | you would use the following line in your .emacs file: | |
360 | ||
361 | (sql-add-product-keywords 'ms | |
362 | '("\\<\\w+_t\\>" . font-lock-type-face)) | |
363 | ||
364 | *** Oracle support includes keyword highlighting for Oracle 9i. Most | |
365 | SQL and PL/SQL keywords are implemented. SQL*Plus commands are | |
366 | highlighted in `font-lock-doc-face'. | |
367 | ||
368 | *** Microsoft SQLServer support has been significantly improved. | |
369 | Keyword highlighting for SqlServer 2000 is implemented. | |
370 | sql-interactive-mode defaults to use osql, rather than isql, because | |
6b61353c | 371 | osql flushes its error stream more frequently. Thus error messages |
668c2ab0 JB |
372 | are displayed when they occur rather than when the session is |
373 | terminated. | |
374 | ||
375 | If the username and password are not provided to `sql-ms', osql is | |
376 | called with the -E command line argument to use the operating system | |
377 | credentials to authenticate the user. | |
378 | ||
379 | *** Imenu support has been enhanced to locate tables, views, indexes, | |
380 | packages, procedures, functions, triggers, sequences, rules, and | |
381 | defaults. | |
382 | ||
383 | *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the | |
384 | appropriate sql-interactive-mode wrapper for the current setting of | |
385 | `sql-product'. | |
386 | ||
80384936 RS |
387 | ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering |
388 | with special modes such as Tar mode. | |
389 | ||
ee216b2c KS |
390 | ** Enhancements to apropos commands: |
391 | ||
392 | *** The apropos commands will now accept a list of words to match. | |
393 | When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must | |
394 | be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still | |
395 | available. | |
396 | ||
397 | *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items | |
398 | to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a | |
399 | number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or | |
400 | regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best | |
401 | match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each | |
402 | matching item. | |
800bebe3 | 403 | |
c6de56a0 RS |
404 | +++ |
405 | ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted, | |
406 | since there are situations where one or the other will shut down | |
407 | the operating system or your X server. | |
408 | ||
409 | ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer. | |
d60f1316 | 410 | When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it |
668c2ab0 | 411 | restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
d60f1316 LT |
412 | |
413 | ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once. | |
414 | By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>. | |
415 | ||
6b61353c KH |
416 | ** Dired mode: |
417 | ||
418 | *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged, | |
419 | dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning | |
420 | introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces. | |
421 | ||
422 | *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' to mark files with | |
423 | different file attributes in two dired buffers. | |
424 | ||
425 | +++ | |
426 | *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now | |
427 | control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded | |
428 | by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards | |
429 | too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the | |
430 | doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent | |
431 | special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'. | |
432 | ||
433 | +++ | |
434 | *** Dired's v command now runs external viewers to view certain | |
435 | types of files. The variable `dired-view-command-alist' controls | |
436 | what external viewers to use and when. | |
437 | ||
438 | *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name | |
439 | into the kill ring. | |
440 | ||
441 | ** Info mode: | |
d60f1316 | 442 | +++ |
6b61353c | 443 | *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default. |
d60f1316 LT |
444 | If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option |
445 | `Info-hide-note-references' to nil. | |
446 | ||
6b61353c KH |
447 | *** The new command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known |
448 | Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the | |
449 | possible matches. | |
450 | ||
451 | +++ | |
452 | *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil. | |
453 | ||
454 | --- | |
455 | *** Info-index offers completion. | |
456 | ||
5d0ab731 JB |
457 | ** Support for the SQLite interpreter has been added to sql.el by calling |
458 | 'sql-sqlite'. | |
459 | ||
bf078377 SM |
460 | ** BibTeX mode: |
461 | *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default. | |
462 | *** bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries can take values `plain', | |
463 | `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used | |
464 | for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting | |
a6aa9850 KG |
465 | scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and |
466 | automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that | |
467 | bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil. | |
468 | ||
469 | *** If the new variable bibtex-parse-keys-fast is non-nil, | |
470 | use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys. | |
471 | ||
472 | *** If the new variable bibtex-autoadd-commas is non-nil, | |
473 | automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields. | |
474 | ||
475 | *** The new variable bibtex-autofill-types contains a list of entry | |
476 | types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible). | |
477 | ||
478 | *** The new command bibtex-complete completes word fragment before | |
479 | point according to context (bound to M-tab). | |
480 | ||
481 | *** The new commands bibtex-find-entry and bibtex-find-crossref | |
482 | locate entries and crossref'd entries. | |
483 | ||
484 | *** In BibTeX mode the command fill-paragraph (bound to M-q) fills | |
485 | individual fields of a BibTeX entry. | |
bf078377 | 486 | |
6f8968c8 KS |
487 | ** When display margins are present in a window, the fringes are now |
488 | displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than | |
489 | at the edges of the window. | |
490 | ||
bd9b2b20 | 491 | ** A window may now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings, |
6f8968c8 KS |
492 | in addition to the individual display margin settings. |
493 | ||
494 | Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split | |
bd9b2b20 | 495 | horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored, |
6f8968c8 KS |
496 | or when the frame is resized. |
497 | ||
6b61353c KH |
498 | ** New functions frame-current-scroll-bars and window-current-scroll-bars. |
499 | ||
500 | These functions return the current locations of the vertical and | |
501 | horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window. | |
502 | ||
503 | --- | |
504 | ** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window | |
505 | opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired | |
506 | buffer copies or moves the file to that directory. | |
507 | ||
2a89019f SM |
508 | ** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default. |
509 | ||
c67de8ba DL |
510 | ** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which may |
511 | speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server. | |
512 | ||
42f81f64 KS |
513 | If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of |
514 | XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on. | |
515 | ||
a95cefd7 | 516 | ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo. |
c64a682c SM |
517 | |
518 | ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer | |
519 | `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'. | |
520 | ||
521 | ** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold', | |
522 | Emacs will prompt her for confirmation. | |
523 | ||
347003be DL |
524 | ** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'. |
525 | ||
556621f6 NR |
526 | ** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior |
527 | and other common debugger commands. | |
528 | ||
1d1d1b1f JB |
529 | ** recentf changes. |
530 | ||
531 | The recent file list is now automatically cleanup when recentf mode is | |
532 | enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do | |
533 | automatic cleanup. | |
534 | ||
535 | With the more advanced option: `recentf-filename-handler', you can | |
536 | specify a function that transforms filenames handled by recentf. For | |
537 | example, if set to `file-truename', the same file will not be in the | |
538 | recent list with different symbolic links. | |
539 | ||
540 | To follow naming convention, `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-flag' | |
541 | and `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag' respectively replace the | |
542 | misnamed options `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p' and | |
543 | `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The old names remain available as | |
544 | aliases, but have been marked obsolete. | |
545 | ||
4cdf4bde DL |
546 | ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken |
547 | from the locale. | |
61cb0b53 | 548 | |
5ab0ceed RS |
549 | ** Init file changes |
550 | ||
551 | You can now put the init files .emacs and .emacs_SHELL under | |
552 | ~/.emacs.d or directly under ~. Emacs will find them in either place. | |
553 | ||
0ec6b206 SM |
554 | ** partial-completion-mode now does partial completion on directory names. |
555 | ||
ff6a3bfb RS |
556 | ** skeleton.el now supports using - to mark the skeleton-point without |
557 | interregion interaction. @ has reverted to only setting | |
558 | skeleton-positions and no longer sets skeleton-point. Skeletons | |
559 | which used @ to mark skeleton-point independent of _ should now use - | |
560 | instead. The updated skeleton-insert docstring explains these new | |
561 | features along with other details of skeleton construction. | |
562 | ||
a1b4049d BW |
563 | ** MH-E changes. |
564 | ||
924df208 | 565 | Upgraded to MH-E version 7.3. There have been major changes since |
a1b4049d BW |
566 | version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details. |
567 | ||
5b8b9fa7 | 568 | +++ |
175573ac DL |
569 | ** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and |
570 | `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given elisp | |
571 | expression and to use the given display when visiting files. | |
572 | ||
573 | ** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process. | |
5b8b9fa7 | 574 | |
f5d0cc77 RS |
575 | +++ |
576 | ** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode. | |
577 | When the file is maintained under version control, that information | |
578 | appears between the position information and the major mode. | |
2c37653c | 579 | |
957e7c38 RS |
580 | ** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer |
581 | against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving. | |
582 | ||
2e4e635a RS |
583 | +++ |
584 | ** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this | |
585 | for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the | |
586 | top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To | |
587 | control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x | |
588 | set-fringe-style. | |
555c87d8 | 589 | |
2e4e635a | 590 | +++ |
d7b590b1 MR |
591 | ** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you |
592 | to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This | |
593 | directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to | |
594 | "~/". | |
595 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 596 | +++ |
af7272b1 RS |
597 | ** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify |
598 | read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you | |
599 | want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you will in fact be able | |
600 | to alter the file.) | |
601 | ||
cc305a60 RS |
602 | ** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r) |
603 | revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify. | |
604 | ||
8798ecdb KH |
605 | ** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name |
606 | of a file. | |
607 | ||
dacec596 | 608 | --- |
4cdf4bde | 609 | ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets. |
dacec596 EZ |
610 | |
611 | Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with | |
612 | ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts. | |
613 | See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts. | |
614 | ||
b03763f4 EZ |
615 | --- |
616 | ** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and | |
617 | `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed | |
618 | in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar. | |
619 | ||
620 | `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays | |
621 | leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer. | |
622 | If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories will be | |
623 | shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil | |
624 | and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively. | |
625 | ||
626 | `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes | |
627 | the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is | |
628 | t, and the status is shown. | |
629 | ||
630 | Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time | |
631 | the Buffers menu is regenerated. | |
632 | ||
2e4e635a | 633 | +++ |
4d3eda1c | 634 | ** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window |
2e4e635a RS |
635 | now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are |
636 | specified for that character, the commands by default customize those | |
637 | faces. | |
4d3eda1c | 638 | |
6b61353c | 639 | ** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik, |
175573ac | 640 | Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6, |
4cdf4bde DL |
641 | Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian, |
642 | Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up | |
643 | automatically according to the locale.) | |
175573ac DL |
644 | |
645 | ** Indian support has been updated. | |
646 | The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are | |
647 | assumed. There is a framework for supporting various | |
4cdf4bde DL |
648 | Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are |
649 | supported. | |
fc2938d1 | 650 | |
813f3d41 | 651 | --- |
fc2938d1 DL |
652 | ** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix, |
653 | ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer, | |
654 | vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard, | |
655 | latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml, | |
4cdf4bde DL |
656 | bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript, |
657 | tamil-inscript. | |
fc2938d1 | 658 | |
813f3d41 RS |
659 | --- |
660 | ** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese | |
661 | in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving, | |
662 | Big 5 is then converted to CNS. | |
663 | ||
664 | --- | |
fc2938d1 DL |
665 | ** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages' |
666 | library. These include complete versions of most of those in | |
6b61353c KH |
667 | codepage.el, based on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now |
668 | obsolete and is used only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. windows-1252 | |
669 | and windows-1251 are preloaded since the former is so common and the | |
670 | latter is used by GNU locales. | |
fc2938d1 | 671 | |
347003be DL |
672 | ** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced. |
673 | By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences (mostly representing CJK | |
674 | characters) are simply composed into single quasi-characters. User | |
675 | option `utf-translate-cjk' arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK | |
676 | character sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the | |
677 | Mule-UCS system. This uses significant space, so is not the default. | |
678 | You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables | |
679 | `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8 | |
680 | coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's | |
742f8710 | 681 | one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones. |
347003be | 682 | The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly. |
a4ac5b17 DL |
683 | |
684 | ** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of | |
685 | characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the | |
686 | fontset appropriately. | |
fc2938d1 DL |
687 | |
688 | ** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its | |
a4ac5b17 | 689 | unicode. |
fc2938d1 | 690 | |
1c6576ab | 691 | +++ |
a4ac5b17 DL |
692 | ** Limited support for character `unification' has been added. |
693 | Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of | |
694 | the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard | |
695 | Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859 | |
696 | sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance, | |
697 | translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the | |
698 | mule-unicode-... ones. | |
699 | ||
700 | By default this translation will happen automatically on encoding. | |
701 | Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant | |
702 | with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where | |
703 | possible. | |
fc2938d1 DL |
704 | |
705 | You can force a more complete unification with the user option | |
706 | unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets | |
707 | into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and | |
a4ac5b17 DL |
708 | mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode |
709 | will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding. | |
fc2938d1 DL |
710 | |
711 | ** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into | |
712 | either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets, | |
713 | when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is | |
e9b9ec8b | 714 | controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding. |
8f9891ab | 715 | |
7443bd8e KH |
716 | ** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets |
717 | coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item | |
718 | (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this | |
719 | command. | |
720 | ||
2a1e884e | 721 | --- |
2e4e635a | 722 | ** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling. |
5a597a71 SM |
723 | On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual |
724 | amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it). | |
725 | ||
6b61353c KH |
726 | --- |
727 | ** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can | |
728 | be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+ and W32). | |
729 | ||
730 | --- | |
731 | ** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif pops down when pressing ESC. | |
732 | ||
733 | +++ | |
734 | ** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be | |
735 | disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'. | |
736 | ||
267bdad3 EZ |
737 | +++ |
738 | ** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor. | |
739 | The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in | |
740 | default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar' | |
741 | cursor does. | |
742 | ||
6b61353c KH |
743 | +++ |
744 | ** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is | |
745 | now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'. | |
746 | ||
c0e48b0b RS |
747 | ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in |
748 | various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on | |
749 | program files that include other program files. | |
750 | ||
751 | Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on | |
752 | all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing | |
753 | in them. | |
754 | ||
172f1af1 EZ |
755 | --- |
756 | ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers | |
757 | when Emacs visits them. | |
758 | ||
2a1e884e | 759 | --- |
ded0c207 EZ |
760 | ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced. |
761 | ||
762 | `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By | |
763 | default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed | |
764 | automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback. | |
765 | ||
b5d2c621 KH |
766 | ** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs |
767 | requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that | |
768 | Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING, | |
769 | and use the more appropriately result. | |
770 | ||
63a4cd16 EZ |
771 | +++ |
772 | ** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized. | |
63a7fdcf EZ |
773 | The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from |
774 | the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling | |
775 | will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5. | |
1a667242 | 776 | |
63a7fdcf EZ |
777 | The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic |
778 | hscrolling will scroll the window when point gets too close to the | |
779 | window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the | |
780 | window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how | |
781 | many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it | |
782 | gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window. | |
783 | ||
813f3d41 RS |
784 | The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to |
785 | `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias. | |
786 | ||
bf078377 | 787 | ** TeX modes: |
a95cefd7 | 788 | *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default. |
2a1e884e | 789 | +++ |
0ec6b206 | 790 | *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced |
63bfbe6f RS |
791 | by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold |
792 | command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold | |
793 | TeX commands to use at startup. | |
0ec6b206 SM |
794 | *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock |
795 | and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts. | |
63bfbe6f | 796 | |
c64a682c SM |
797 | *** New major mode doctex-mode for *.dtx files. |
798 | ||
2a1e884e | 799 | +++ |
b0ada147 RS |
800 | ** New display feature: focus follows the mouse from one Emacs window |
801 | to another, even within a frame. If you set the variable | |
802 | mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a | |
803 | different Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can | |
804 | be selected only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this | |
805 | feature is not enabled. | |
3996d07a | 806 | |
6b61353c KH |
807 | ** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to |
808 | select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position | |
809 | normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set | |
810 | the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected | |
811 | window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame | |
812 | to give it focus. | |
813 | ||
1c6576ab RS |
814 | +++ |
815 | ** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with | |
816 | description various information about a character, including its | |
817 | encodings and syntax, its text properties, overlays, and widgets at | |
818 | point. You can get more information about some of them, by clicking | |
819 | on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET. | |
c145bbb3 | 820 | |
81f755ae CW |
821 | +++ |
822 | ** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can | |
823 | search multiple buffers. There is also a new command | |
824 | `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the | |
825 | buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been | |
826 | rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes. | |
827 | ||
2a1e884e | 828 | +++ |
b2bd7aff RS |
829 | ** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse |
830 | is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you | |
831 | can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the | |
832 | mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can | |
833 | also disable mouse highlighting. | |
90e87070 | 834 | |
2a1e884e | 835 | +++ |
fd42af9d SM |
836 | ** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that |
837 | an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment, | |
838 | font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red | |
839 | if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause | |
840 | trouble with fontification and/or indentation. | |
841 | ||
236f1c76 EZ |
842 | +++ |
843 | ** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'. | |
844 | Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the | |
845 | variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the | |
846 | prompt string. | |
847 | ||
9a770d8d | 848 | +++ |
fd4f8b36 KS |
849 | ** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line |
850 | of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display | |
851 | the mode line of the currently selected window. | |
852 | ||
89f8199f KS |
853 | The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether |
854 | the `mode-line-inactive' face is used. | |
855 | ||
2e4e635a | 856 | --- |
1f600b1b | 857 | ** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options". |
2e4e635a RS |
858 | This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such |
859 | as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself). | |
860 | You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn | |
861 | it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of | |
862 | current date and time, current line and column number in the | |
863 | mode-line. | |
1f600b1b | 864 | |
2e4e635a | 865 | --- |
a9c6d330 PA |
866 | ** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide". |
867 | ||
2a1e884e | 868 | +++ |
347003be | 869 | ** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mail |
2a1e884e | 870 | in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option |
7c961dc2 | 871 | `display-time-mail-directory'. |
2d4ef682 | 872 | |
a4fc6fc9 PJ |
873 | --- |
874 | ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2. | |
875 | ||
e58d8457 | 876 | +++ |
5e101746 | 877 | ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it. |
e58d8457 | 878 | M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no |
5e101746 RS |
879 | argument it toggles the mode. |
880 | ||
881 | Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings | |
882 | that were replaced by turning on the mode. | |
883 | ||
2e4e635a | 884 | +++ |
b54cfb55 CW |
885 | ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line |
886 | arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash | |
887 | disables the splash screen; see also the variable | |
888 | `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as | |
889 | `inhibit-splash-screen'). | |
890 | ||
7cc8f35a EZ |
891 | ** Changes in support of colors on character terminals |
892 | ||
e0c124ce | 893 | +++ |
7cc8f35a | 894 | *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard |
e0c124ce EZ |
895 | mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character |
896 | terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal | |
897 | database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't | |
898 | set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable | |
899 | terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls' | |
900 | when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors | |
901 | in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the | |
902 | user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter. | |
903 | ||
7cc8f35a EZ |
904 | --- |
905 | *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more | |
906 | than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and | |
907 | 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup | |
908 | the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for | |
909 | all of these colors. | |
910 | ||
6b61353c KH |
911 | +++ |
912 | *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default | |
913 | faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and | |
914 | 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an | |
915 | 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face | |
916 | colors as on X. | |
917 | ||
7cc8f35a EZ |
918 | --- |
919 | *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator. | |
920 | ||
6625fc7d EZ |
921 | +++ |
922 | ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display. | |
923 | ||
924 | When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options | |
925 | `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame | |
926 | whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire | |
616d7a51 | 927 | screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.) |
6625fc7d | 928 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 929 | --- |
a8f57660 | 930 | ** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files |
2b6bb1f2 | 931 | automatically. |
cb8d4d07 | 932 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 933 | +++ |
eaffd16d | 934 | ** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived |
4e3dd7cf MB |
935 | modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines, |
936 | like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but | |
937 | otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version. | |
938 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 939 | +++ |
00b1ee61 RS |
940 | ** Changes in C-h bindings: |
941 | ||
942 | C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer. | |
943 | ||
944 | C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files | |
945 | that do not change: | |
946 | ||
947 | C-h C-f displays the FAQ. | |
948 | C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file. | |
949 | ||
950 | The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i | |
951 | have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S. | |
952 | ||
93607efd KS |
953 | C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands. |
954 | ||
955 | - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping) | |
956 | run by the key sequence. | |
957 | ||
958 | - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the | |
959 | command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run | |
960 | that command. | |
961 | ||
962 | For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped | |
bf8dd4e3 | 963 | to new-kill-line, these commands now report: |
93607efd KS |
964 | |
965 | - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports: | |
966 | C-k runs the command new-kill-line | |
967 | ||
968 | - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports: | |
969 | kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline> | |
970 | ||
971 | - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports: | |
972 | new-kill-line is on C-k | |
973 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 974 | +++ |
a207b33c RS |
975 | ** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word, |
976 | making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the | |
977 | command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior, | |
978 | bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'. | |
979 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 980 | +++ |
d9f7eb77 RS |
981 | ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can |
982 | be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable | |
983 | `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion | |
984 | of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties. | |
985 | ||
1c6576ab | 986 | +++ |
b54cfb55 CW |
987 | ** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using |
988 | M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable | |
989 | `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification, | |
990 | remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'. | |
991 | ||
1c6576ab | 992 | +++ |
4e3dd7cf MB |
993 | ** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line |
994 | by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep will automatically | |
995 | detect whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked. | |
996 | When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed | |
997 | unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated | |
998 | command lines to be used than was possible before. | |
999 | ||
1c6576ab | 1000 | --- |
4e3dd7cf MB |
1001 | ** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing. |
1002 | In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding | |
1003 | check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection | |
1004 | for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make | |
1005 | sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking | |
1006 | its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in | |
1007 | case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden. | |
1008 | ||
3116d142 | 1009 | +++ |
c721078e RS |
1010 | ** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer, |
1011 | the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable. | |
1012 | You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value" | |
1013 | under the "[State]" button. | |
1014 | ||
63db1bb3 MR |
1015 | ** The new customization type `float' specifies numbers with floating |
1016 | point (no integers are allowed). | |
1017 | ||
2b6bb1f2 RS |
1018 | +++ |
1019 | ** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program | |
4febb0e7 RS |
1020 | counter to the specified source line (the one where point is). |
1021 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 1022 | --- |
ca64d378 | 1023 | ** GUD mode improvements for jdb: |
a1e3dda0 RS |
1024 | |
1025 | *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class | |
1026 | information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all | |
1027 | source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain | |
1028 | lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' | |
1029 | and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation. | |
1030 | ||
1031 | *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear) | |
1032 | set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack | |
1033 | traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish | |
1034 | (gud-finish). | |
1035 | ||
1036 | *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb | |
1037 | (Java 1.1 jdb). | |
1038 | ||
1039 | *** The previous method of searching for source files has been | |
1040 | preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it. | |
1041 | Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil. | |
1042 | ||
1043 | Added Customization Variables | |
1044 | ||
1045 | *** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb. | |
1046 | ||
1047 | *** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching | |
1048 | method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for | |
1049 | java sources (previous method). | |
1050 | ||
1051 | *** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java | |
1052 | classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath | |
1053 | is nil). | |
1054 | ||
1055 | Minor Improvements | |
1056 | ||
1057 | *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds. | |
1058 | ||
1c6576ab | 1059 | +++ |
43a88bc1 SM |
1060 | ** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display |
1061 | to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly | |
6b61353c | 1062 | changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p. |
05ea8efd | 1063 | |
1c6576ab | 1064 | +++ |
111ed14e SM |
1065 | ** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when |
1066 | the corresponding environment variable does not exist. | |
1067 | Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting | |
1068 | is only rarely needed. | |
1069 | ||
1c6576ab | 1070 | --- |
6b61353c KH |
1071 | ** JIT-lock changes |
1072 | *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'. | |
8ea55f33 EZ |
1073 | |
1074 | If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs | |
fbe51115 | 1075 | idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For |
8ea55f33 EZ |
1076 | example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will |
1077 | only happen after 0.25s of idle time. | |
f67cc62e | 1078 | |
6b61353c KH |
1079 | *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification. |
1080 | ||
1081 | jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and | |
1082 | jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual | |
1083 | refontification takes place. | |
1084 | ||
cad113ae KG |
1085 | +++ |
1086 | ** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If | |
1087 | you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or | |
1088 | C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region will now be extended | |
1089 | each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, | |
1090 | for example. This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you | |
1091 | bind that to a key. | |
6710ea06 | 1092 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 1093 | +++ |
18f10eda RS |
1094 | ** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the |
1095 | mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the | |
1096 | region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might | |
1097 | want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two | |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
1098 | ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one |
1099 | command only. | |
18f10eda | 1100 | |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
1101 | One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode |
1102 | and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x. | |
1103 | This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the | |
1104 | mark or the region. | |
32f665fa | 1105 | |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
1106 | After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you |
1107 | deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command | |
1108 | that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing | |
1109 | C-g. | |
66aa61d8 | 1110 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 1111 | +++ |
66aa61d8 KS |
1112 | ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a |
1113 | previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... will cycle through the | |
1114 | mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump. | |
1115 | ||
1c6576ab | 1116 | +++ |
a474d59c RS |
1117 | ** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and |
1118 | C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without | |
1119 | switching to it. | |
7c425d82 | 1120 | |
1c6576ab | 1121 | +++ |
7c425d82 RS |
1122 | ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to |
1123 | all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only | |
1124 | affects the initial frame. | |
1125 | ||
efe459e4 | 1126 | +++ |
fbe51115 PJ |
1127 | ** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg. |
1128 | With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs; | |
564b1f76 EZ |
1129 | if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding |
1130 | paragraphs. | |
efe459e4 | 1131 | |
1c6576ab | 1132 | +++ |
b04dcf45 RS |
1133 | ** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args |
1134 | have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and | |
1135 | directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a | |
1136 | directory listing into a buffer. | |
1137 | ||
1c6576ab | 1138 | --- |
6710ea06 SM |
1139 | ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window |
1140 | (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'. | |
1141 | ||
cc563ece KS |
1142 | ** Unexpected yanking of text due to accidental clicking on the mouse |
1143 | wheel button (typically mouse-2) during wheel scrolling is now avoided. | |
1144 | This behaviour can be customized via the mouse-wheel-click-event and | |
1145 | mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables. | |
1146 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 1147 | +++ |
457c233a DL |
1148 | ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your |
1149 | current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This | |
1150 | may mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII | |
1151 | characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal | |
1152 | emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize | |
1153 | keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default) | |
1154 | or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated | |
1155 | by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'. | |
16927a56 | 1156 | |
3aa2f38a RS |
1157 | +++ |
1158 | ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs | |
273a3930 EZ |
1159 | automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save |
1160 | modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It | |
1161 | can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first, | |
2bc8d7c8 | 1162 | according to the value of `save-abbrevs'. |
3aa2f38a | 1163 | |
1c6576ab | 1164 | +++ |
830047fd RS |
1165 | ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any) |
1166 | of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor | |
1167 | appears in. | |
6c0b2643 | 1168 | |
d5ec54b6 KS |
1169 | ** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any |
1170 | of the recognized cursor types. | |
c60ee5e7 | 1171 | |
1c6576ab | 1172 | --- |
758bf24f GM |
1173 | ** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that |
1174 | controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will | |
1175 | attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files). | |
1176 | ||
f5d0cc77 RS |
1177 | +++ |
1178 | ** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar. | |
1179 | Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as | |
6b61353c | 1180 | `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK, |
f5d0cc77 RS |
1181 | which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating |
1182 | how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a | |
1183 | single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the | |
1184 | day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that | |
1185 | face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations, | |
1186 | appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp. | |
1187 | ||
6b61353c KH |
1188 | +++ |
1189 | ** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a | |
1190 | year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers | |
1191 | count backward from the end of the year. | |
1192 | ||
1193 | ** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line. | |
1194 | This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag' | |
1195 | and `diary-header-line-format'. | |
1196 | ||
1197 | +++ | |
1198 | ** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed: use | |
1199 | the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable | |
1200 | `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing | |
1201 | appt-issue-message, appt-visible, and appt-msg-window. | |
1202 | ||
3f270c8a AS |
1203 | ** VC Changes |
1204 | ||
fc08c987 AS |
1205 | *** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes |
1206 | the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this | |
1207 | change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy | |
1208 | with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you | |
1209 | can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs: | |
1210 | ||
1211 | (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only) | |
1212 | ||
1213 | The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist. | |
1214 | ||
1c6576ab | 1215 | +++ |
3f270c8a AS |
1216 | *** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows |
1217 | you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked | |
1218 | by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which | |
1219 | means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this | |
1220 | allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for | |
1221 | CVS. | |
1222 | ||
c64a682c SM |
1223 | *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS. |
1224 | ||
eb766f96 MK |
1225 | ** EDiff changes. |
1226 | ||
16757dcf | 1227 | +++ |
eb766f96 MK |
1228 | *** When comparing directories. |
1229 | Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of | |
1230 | directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files | |
1231 | from one directory to another. | |
1232 | ||
16757dcf | 1233 | +++ |
eb766f96 MK |
1234 | *** When comparing files or buffers. |
1235 | Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the | |
1236 | currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n' | |
1237 | then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for | |
1238 | comparison. | |
1239 | ||
5d9c22fd | 1240 | *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent |
813f3d41 RS |
1241 | backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file, |
1242 | `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup. | |
1243 | ||
ca8f3642 | 1244 | +++ |
e94a3679 FP |
1245 | ** Etags changes. |
1246 | ||
73639417 FP |
1247 | *** New regular expressions features |
1248 | ||
1249 | **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions. | |
df3eebcb FP |
1250 | The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained |
1251 | only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is | |
1252 | --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS, | |
1253 | where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or | |
1254 | more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s' | |
6861f0e3 FP |
1255 | (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular |
1256 | expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s' | |
1257 | (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to | |
1258 | span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions | |
1259 | and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages. | |
1260 | ||
2c37653c | 1261 | **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc. |
6861f0e3 FP |
1262 | The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v, |
1263 | respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL, | |
1264 | CR, TAB, VT, | |
1265 | ||
2c37653c | 1266 | **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language. |
df3eebcb FP |
1267 | The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags |
1268 | only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is | |
1269 | particularly useful when storing regexps in a file. | |
1270 | ||
2c37653c | 1271 | **** Regular expressions can be read from a file. |
df3eebcb FP |
1272 | The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one |
1273 | per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. | |
1274 | ||
73639417 FP |
1275 | *** New language parsing features |
1276 | ||
d9256ccb FP |
1277 | **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file. |
1278 | Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect. | |
1279 | ||
73639417 | 1280 | **** In Perl, packages are tags. |
81d66c62 FP |
1281 | Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags |
1282 | as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for | |
1283 | package::sub. | |
1284 | ||
2c37653c FP |
1285 | **** New language PHP. |
1286 | Tags are functions, classes and defines. | |
f175bfff FP |
1287 | If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are vars also. |
1288 | ||
2c37653c FP |
1289 | **** New language HTML. |
1290 | Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is | |
1291 | used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used. | |
1292 | ||
73639417 | 1293 | **** New default keywords for TeX. |
a0bbc0c5 FP |
1294 | The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and |
1295 | renewenvironment. | |
1296 | ||
2c37653c | 1297 | **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged. |
dfd67a62 | 1298 | If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the |
f175bfff FP |
1299 | size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option. |
1300 | ||
1301 | **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates. | |
81d66c62 FP |
1302 | |
1303 | *** Honour #line directives. | |
1304 | When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line | |
1305 | directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number | |
1306 | specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code | |
1307 | created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it | |
1308 | writes tags pointing to the source file. | |
bf8dd4e3 | 1309 | |
2c37653c | 1310 | *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE. |
a0bbc0c5 | 1311 | This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can |
5cc4f104 | 1312 | be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags |
a0bbc0c5 FP |
1313 | will read from standard input and mark the produced tags as belonging to |
1314 | the file FILE. | |
06ee6fcd | 1315 | |
c30567b7 | 1316 | +++ |
b5a67081 MS |
1317 | ** CC Mode changes. |
1318 | ||
1319 | *** Font lock support. | |
1320 | CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This | |
1321 | supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock | |
1322 | package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font | |
1323 | locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new | |
1324 | AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be | |
1325 | different from the old patterns in various details for most languages. | |
1326 | ||
1327 | The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a | |
1328 | dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like | |
1329 | strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like | |
1330 | declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great | |
1331 | lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when | |
1332 | the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly | |
1333 | demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can | |
1334 | therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the | |
1335 | variable font-lock-maximum-decoration. | |
1336 | ||
1337 | Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy | |
1338 | fontification in mind, i.e. there should be a support mode that waits | |
1339 | with the fontification until the text is actually shown | |
1340 | (e.g. Just-in-time Lock mode, which is the default, or Lazy Lock | |
1341 | mode). Fontifying a file with several thousand lines in one go can | |
1342 | take the better part of a minute. | |
1343 | ||
1344 | **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables | |
1345 | are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to | |
1346 | be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font | |
1347 | locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized | |
1348 | properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and | |
1349 | not contain patterns for uncertain types. | |
1350 | ||
1351 | **** Support for documentation comments. | |
1352 | There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like | |
1353 | Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host | |
1354 | language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C | |
1355 | buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details. | |
1356 | ||
1357 | Currently two kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Suns Javadoc | |
1358 | and Autodoc which is used in Pike. This is by no means a complete | |
1359 | list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor of choice | |
1360 | is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | |
1361 | ||
1362 | **** Better handling of C++ templates. | |
1363 | As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are | |
1364 | now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are | |
1365 | given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other | |
1366 | parens. | |
1367 | ||
1368 | This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is | |
1369 | work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline | |
1370 | template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be | |
1371 | recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and | |
1372 | not as configurable as it ought to be. | |
1373 | ||
1374 | **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL. | |
1375 | Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul. | |
1376 | The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly. | |
1377 | All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and | |
1378 | handled correctly, also wrt indentation. | |
1379 | ||
1380 | *** Support for the AWK language. | |
1381 | Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is | |
1382 | based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with | |
1383 | any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK. | |
1384 | Here is a summary: | |
1385 | ||
1386 | **** Indentation Engine | |
1387 | The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode. | |
1388 | ||
1389 | AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s | |
1390 | which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are | |
1391 | placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s | |
1392 | are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function | |
1393 | definition, or structured statement. | |
1394 | ||
1395 | The predefined indentation functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK | |
1396 | mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't be | |
1397 | any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode. | |
1398 | ||
1399 | The command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) hasn't yet been adapted for AWK, | |
1400 | though in practice it works properly nearly all the time. Should it | |
1401 | fail, explicitly set the region around the function (using C-u C-SPC: | |
1402 | C-M-h probably won't work either) then do C-M-\ (indent-region). | |
1403 | ||
1404 | **** Font Locking | |
1405 | There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the | |
1406 | three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several | |
1407 | idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of | |
1408 | the AWK language itself. | |
1409 | ||
1410 | **** Comment Commands | |
1411 | M-; (indent-for-comment) works fine. None of the other CC Mode | |
1412 | comment formatting commands have yet been adapted for AWK mode. | |
1413 | ||
1414 | **** Movement Commands | |
1415 | Most of the movement commands work in AWK mode. The most important | |
1416 | exceptions are M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) and M-e | |
1417 | (c-end-of-statement) which haven't yet been adapted. | |
1418 | ||
1419 | The notion of "defun" has been augmented to include AWK pattern-action | |
1420 | pairs. C-M-a (c-awk-beginning-of-defun) and C-M-e (c-awk-end-of-defun) | |
1421 | recognise these pattern-action pairs, as well as user defined | |
1422 | functions. | |
1423 | ||
1424 | **** Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups | |
1425 | Auto-newline insertion hasn't yet been adapted for AWK. Some of | |
1426 | the clean-ups can actually convert good AWK code into syntactically | |
1427 | invalid code. These features are best disabled in AWK buffers. | |
1428 | ||
1429 | *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode. | |
1430 | The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are | |
1431 | now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols | |
1432 | module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open, | |
1433 | composition-close, and incomposition. | |
1434 | ||
1435 | *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode. | |
1436 | The functions c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forward can be | |
1437 | bound to keys to get this feature without toggling a mode. | |
1438 | Contributed by Kevin Ryde. | |
1439 | ||
1440 | *** Better control over require-final-newline. | |
1441 | The variable that controls how to handle a final newline when the | |
1442 | buffer is saved, require-final-newline, is now customizable on a | |
1443 | per-mode basis through c-require-final-newline. The default is to set | |
1444 | it to t only in languages that mandate a final newline in source files | |
1445 | (C, C++ and Objective-C). | |
1446 | ||
94b562dc MS |
1447 | *** Format change for syntactic context elements. |
1448 | The elements in the syntactic context returned by c-guess-basic-syntax | |
1449 | and stored in c-syntactic-context has been changed somewhat to allow | |
1450 | attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons | |
1451 | cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis | |
1452 | ||
1453 | ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13)) | |
1454 | ||
1455 | is now analysed as | |
1456 | ||
1457 | ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13)) | |
1458 | ||
1459 | In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic | |
1460 | symbol. | |
1461 | ||
1462 | This change might affect code that call c-guess-basic-syntax directly, | |
1463 | and custom lineup functions if they use c-syntactic-context. However, | |
1464 | the argument given to lineup functions is still a single cons cell | |
1465 | with nil or an integer in the cdr. | |
b5a67081 MS |
1466 | |
1467 | *** API changes for derived modes. | |
1468 | There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect | |
1469 | derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause | |
1470 | incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand | |
1471 | care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC | |
1472 | Mode with less risk of such problems in the future. | |
1473 | ||
1474 | **** New language variable system. | |
1475 | See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el. | |
1476 | ||
1477 | **** New initialization functions. | |
1478 | The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to | |
1479 | give better control: c-basic-common-init, c-font-lock-init, and | |
1480 | c-init-language-vars. | |
1481 | ||
1482 | *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs. | |
1483 | The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where | |
1484 | several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are | |
1485 | now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own. | |
1486 | ||
1487 | This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and | |
1488 | although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way | |
1489 | gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation | |
1490 | where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report | |
1491 | it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | |
1492 | ||
1493 | **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label. | |
1494 | This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and | |
1495 | its substatement. E.g: | |
1496 | ||
1497 | if (x) | |
1498 | x_is_true: | |
1499 | do_stuff(); | |
1500 | ||
1501 | *** Better handling of multiline macros. | |
1502 | ||
1503 | **** Syntactic indentation inside macros. | |
1504 | The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented | |
1505 | syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new | |
1506 | variable c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros. A new syntactic symbol | |
1507 | cpp-define-intro has been added to control the initial indentation | |
1508 | inside #define's. | |
1509 | ||
1510 | **** New lineup function c-lineup-cpp-define. | |
1511 | Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior | |
1512 | of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro | |
1513 | is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily | |
1514 | removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works | |
1515 | much line c-lineup-dont-change, which was used earlier, but handles | |
1516 | empty lines within the macro better. | |
1517 | ||
1518 | **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one. | |
1519 | This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to | |
1520 | c-context-line-break and c-context-open-line. | |
1521 | ||
1522 | **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes. | |
1523 | c-backslash-region tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New | |
1524 | variable c-backslash-max-column which put a limit on how far out | |
1525 | backslashes can be moved. | |
1526 | ||
1527 | **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes. | |
1528 | This is controlled by the new variable c-auto-align-backslashes. It | |
1529 | affects c-context-line-break, c-context-open-line and newlines | |
1530 | inserted in auto-newline mode. | |
1531 | ||
1532 | **** Line indentation works better inside macros. | |
1533 | Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation | |
1534 | inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the | |
1535 | line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic | |
1536 | indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the | |
1537 | backslash) in the macro. | |
1538 | ||
1539 | *** indent-for-comment is more customizable. | |
1540 | The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through | |
1541 | the variable c-indent-comment-alist. The indentation behavior based | |
1542 | on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after #else | |
1543 | and #endif but indentation to comment-column in most other cases | |
1544 | (something which was hardcoded earlier). | |
1545 | ||
1546 | *** New function c-context-open-line. | |
1547 | It's the open-line equivalent of c-context-line-break. | |
1548 | ||
1549 | *** New lineup functions | |
1550 | ||
1551 | **** c-lineup-string-cont | |
1552 | This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it | |
1553 | continues. E.g: | |
1554 | ||
1555 | result = prefix + "A message " | |
1556 | "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont | |
1557 | ||
1558 | **** c-lineup-cascaded-calls | |
1559 | Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".". | |
1560 | ||
1561 | **** c-lineup-knr-region-comment | |
1562 | Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in | |
1563 | the "K&R region" between the function header and its body. | |
1564 | ||
1565 | **** c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg | |
1566 | Provides better indentation inside asm blocks. Contributed by Kevin | |
1567 | Ryde. | |
1568 | ||
1569 | **** c-lineup-argcont | |
1570 | Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma. | |
1571 | Contributed by Kevin Ryde. | |
1572 | ||
1573 | *** Better caching of the syntactic context. | |
1574 | CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind) | |
1575 | of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many | |
1576 | places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now | |
1577 | improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is | |
1578 | moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated. | |
1579 | ||
1580 | The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when | |
1581 | opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically | |
1582 | only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex | |
1583 | file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic | |
1584 | context. | |
1585 | ||
1586 | *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way. | |
1587 | Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an | |
1588 | "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can | |
1589 | happen when macros are involved. | |
1590 | ||
1591 | *** Improved the way c-indent-exp chooses the block to indent. | |
1592 | It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point | |
1593 | whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the | |
1594 | point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent. | |
1595 | Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current | |
1596 | line is left untouched. | |
1597 | ||
1598 | *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation. | |
1599 | The function c-toggle-syntactic-indentation can be used to toggle | |
1600 | syntactic indentation. | |
1601 | ||
406f228c PJ |
1602 | ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to |
1603 | --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated. | |
1604 | ||
1c6576ab | 1605 | +++ |
7ea42709 RS |
1606 | ** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because |
1607 | C-u C-x = gives the same information and more. | |
1608 | ||
1c6576ab | 1609 | +++ |
3a426197 | 1610 | ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin |
1c6576ab RS |
1611 | with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers |
1612 | whose names begin with space are omitted. | |
c30567b7 | 1613 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 1614 | +++ |
3a426197 RS |
1615 | ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where |
1616 | filling can break lines. We provide two sample predicates, | |
1617 | fill-single-word-nobreak-p and fill-french-nobreak-p. | |
8e8223e2 | 1618 | |
1c6576ab | 1619 | +++ |
1d57ac82 SS |
1620 | ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'. |
1621 | When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry will always | |
1622 | start a new record regardless of when the last record is. | |
1623 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 1624 | +++ |
2881ae98 SM |
1625 | ** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax. |
1626 | The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax. | |
54c0e682 | 1627 | When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style, |
79014980 | 1628 | i.e., there is always a closing tag. |
2881ae98 | 1629 | By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis |
54c0e682 | 1630 | from the file name or buffer contents. |
79014980 | 1631 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 1632 | +++ |
9252f7bc | 1633 | ** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support. |
cb8d4d07 | 1634 | |
1c6576ab | 1635 | +++ |
aae126ea | 1636 | ** New user option `isearch-resume-enabled'. |
dfd67a62 | 1637 | This option can be disabled, to avoid the normal behavior of isearch |
aae126ea KS |
1638 | which puts calls to `isearch-resume' in the command history. |
1639 | ||
2a1e884e | 1640 | --- |
1c6576ab | 1641 | ** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings. |
30de4b24 | 1642 | |
1c6576ab RS |
1643 | --- |
1644 | ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'. | |
30de4b24 | 1645 | |
2d588beb | 1646 | +++ |
1c6576ab | 1647 | ** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'. |
2d588beb GM |
1648 | Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use. |
1649 | Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking. | |
a68c5400 | 1650 | |
1c6576ab RS |
1651 | --- |
1652 | ** F90 mode has new navigation commands `f90-end-of-block', | |
0d9e03be | 1653 | `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block', `f90-previous-block'. |
e47b1d49 | 1654 | |
1c6576ab RS |
1655 | --- |
1656 | ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords' | |
2629d743 TTN |
1657 | to support use of font-lock. |
1658 | ||
1c6576ab | 1659 | +++ |
026f408d SM |
1660 | ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now |
1661 | understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and | |
1662 | `same-window'. | |
1663 | ||
1c6576ab | 1664 | +++ |
6c0b2643 GM |
1665 | ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and |
1666 | `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To | |
1667 | include a `$' in the value, use `$$'. | |
1668 | ||
30743573 | 1669 | +++ |
58a11372 EZ |
1670 | ** File-name completion can now ignore directories. |
1671 | If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a | |
1672 | slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when | |
1673 | completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' | |
1674 | which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion | |
1675 | candidate is a directory. | |
1676 | ||
1c6576ab | 1677 | +++ |
af7272b1 RS |
1678 | ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only |
1679 | to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point, | |
1c6576ab RS |
1680 | it remains unchanged. |
1681 | ||
6b61353c KH |
1682 | ** Visual feedback of *Completions* buffer is enhanced. |
1683 | Faces are put on the common prefix substrings and the first uncommon | |
1684 | charachters of each completion candidate in the *Completions* buffer. | |
1685 | `completion-de-emphasis' is put on the common prefix substrings as the | |
1686 | face; and `completion-emphasis' is put on the first uncommon | |
1687 | charachters. By default `completion-de-emphasis' is inherited from | |
1688 | `default' face. `completion-emphasis' is inherited from `bold' face. | |
1689 | ||
2a1e884e | 1690 | +++ |
6c0b2643 GM |
1691 | ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'. |
1692 | When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally | |
1693 | displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off. | |
1694 | ||
6b61353c KH |
1695 | ** Compilation mode enhancements: |
1696 | ||
1697 | *** New user option `compilation-environment'. | |
eb6055fa JPW |
1698 | This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior |
1699 | compilation processes without affecting the environment that all | |
1700 | subprocesses inherit. | |
1701 | ||
6b61353c KH |
1702 | *** `next-error' now temporarily highlights the corresponding source line. |
1703 | ||
1704 | ** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup. | |
1705 | ||
1706 | *** Grep commands now have their own submenu and customization group. | |
1707 | ||
1708 | *** The new variables `grep-window-height', `grep-auto-highlight', and | |
1709 | `grep-scroll-output' can be used to override the corresponding | |
1710 | compilation mode settings for grep commands. | |
1711 | ||
1712 | *** Source line is temporarily highlighted when going to next match. | |
1713 | ||
1714 | *** New key bindings in grep output window: | |
1715 | SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and | |
1716 | previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of | |
1717 | the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in | |
1718 | other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the | |
1719 | previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next | |
1720 | file. | |
1721 | ||
2a1e884e | 1722 | --- |
6c0b2643 GM |
1723 | ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer. |
1724 | ||
2a1e884e | 1725 | --- |
d3d268d5 JR |
1726 | ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor. |
1727 | This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track | |
1728 | the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs. | |
1729 | ||
2a1e884e | 1730 | --- |
f58b2333 JR |
1731 | ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows. |
1732 | See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details. | |
1733 | ||
2a1e884e | 1734 | --- |
3b7db268 JR |
1735 | ** Images are now supported on MS Windows. |
1736 | PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats | |
1737 | depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported | |
1738 | to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at | |
1739 | http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on | |
1740 | zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled | |
1741 | against. | |
a3dde781 | 1742 | |
f85bf1bf JR |
1743 | --- |
1744 | ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows. | |
1745 | WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such | |
6c098dbe | 1746 | as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of |
f85bf1bf JR |
1747 | Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level |
1748 | sound support for those formats. | |
1749 | ||
6c098dbe JR |
1750 | --- |
1751 | ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows. | |
1752 | The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer. | |
1753 | ||
1c6576ab | 1754 | --- |
01a7f683 JR |
1755 | ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows. |
1756 | The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls | |
1757 | whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or | |
1758 | pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions. | |
1759 | ||
d18c4f98 JR |
1760 | --- |
1761 | ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows. | |
1762 | The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in | |
1763 | much the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now | |
1764 | adds these colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu | |
1765 | for the default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), | |
1766 | and uses some of them to initialize some of the default faces. | |
1767 | `list-colors-display' will show the list of System color names if you | |
1768 | wish to use them in other faces. | |
1769 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 1770 | +++ |
98659da6 KG |
1771 | ** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper). |
1772 | The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym', | |
1773 | and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should | |
1774 | use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap | |
1775 | Meta and Alt: | |
1776 | (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta) | |
1777 | (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt) | |
1778 | ||
6b61353c KH |
1779 | +++ |
1780 | ** vc-annotate-mode enhancements | |
1781 | ||
1782 | In vc-annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for | |
1783 | enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or | |
1784 | to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode: | |
1785 | ||
1786 | P: annotates the previous revision | |
1787 | N: annotates the next revision | |
1788 | J: annotates the revision at line | |
1789 | A: annotates the revision previous to line | |
1790 | D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision | |
1791 | L: shows the log of the revision at line | |
1792 | W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version | |
1793 | \f | |
1794 | * New modes and packages in Emacs 21.4 | |
1795 | ||
1796 | ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs. | |
1797 | ||
1798 | ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs. | |
1799 | ||
1800 | +++ | |
1801 | ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default) | |
1802 | shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line. | |
8f8da2d0 | 1803 | |
a95cefd7 | 1804 | ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit. |
556621f6 | 1805 | |
8f8da2d0 | 1806 | --- |
cd3782b4 KS |
1807 | ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
1808 | ||
1809 | The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb | |
1810 | package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition | |
1811 | to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with | |
1812 | a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages. | |
ffe5000a | 1813 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 1814 | --- |
cd3782b4 KS |
1815 | ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
1816 | ||
1817 | The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for | |
2461722b KS |
1818 | cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo. |
1819 | With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement | |
1820 | keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active | |
1821 | region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with | |
1822 | cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua. | |
1823 | ||
1824 | In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible | |
1825 | rectangle highlighting: Use S-return to start a rectangle, extend it | |
1826 | using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x | |
1827 | or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works). | |
1828 | ||
1829 | Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to | |
1830 | fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or | |
1831 | downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the | |
1832 | rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such | |
1833 | as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use | |
1834 | M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the | |
1835 | rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands. | |
1836 | ||
1837 | Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric | |
1838 | prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and | |
1839 | C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9. | |
1840 | ||
1841 | The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in | |
1842 | register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text. | |
1843 | ||
1844 | Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space. | |
1845 | When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is | |
1846 | automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the | |
1847 | commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands. | |
1848 | ||
1849 | The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for | |
1850 | kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't | |
1851 | want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you may customize the | |
1852 | `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable. | |
1853 | ||
cd3782b4 KS |
1854 | Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older |
1855 | versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you | |
1856 | must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the | |
1857 | loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file. | |
1858 | ||
4e5cdb4f | 1859 | ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for |
7920598e KS |
1860 | the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric |
1861 | keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked | |
1862 | +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad | |
1863 | package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys. | |
1864 | ||
1865 | By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup', | |
1866 | `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by | |
1867 | using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and | |
1868 | the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four | |
1869 | possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and | |
1870 | the NumLock toggle state (off/on). | |
1871 | ||
1872 | The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are: | |
1873 | `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits, | |
1874 | `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the | |
1875 | decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization), | |
1876 | `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args | |
1877 | for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys' | |
1878 | where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and | |
63e489f5 KS |
1879 | `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.) |
1880 | are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global | |
1881 | or local keymaps. | |
2461722b | 1882 | |
4e5cdb4f | 1883 | ** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to |
ffe5000a KS |
1884 | emacs' keyboard macro facilities. |
1885 | ||
e1fa392b KS |
1886 | Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this: |
1887 | F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes | |
1888 | the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value | |
ffe5000a KS |
1889 | which automatically increments every time the macro is executed. |
1890 | ||
cc801373 KS |
1891 | There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently |
1892 | defined macros. | |
1893 | ||
1894 | The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which | |
1895 | defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring, | |
1896 | C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e, | |
1897 | manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c, | |
1898 | C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el | |
1899 | for more commands. | |
1900 | ||
2c37653c | 1901 | The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to |
cc801373 | 1902 | the keyboard macro ring. |
ffe5000a | 1903 | |
f1f83e21 KS |
1904 | The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro |
1905 | before calling it, if used while defining a macro. | |
e1fa392b KS |
1906 | |
1907 | In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can | |
1908 | be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize | |
1909 | this behaviour via the variable kmacro-call-repeat-key and | |
1910 | kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg. | |
1911 | ||
f1f83e21 KS |
1912 | Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively. |
1913 | C-x C-k SPC will step through the last keyboard macro one key sequence | |
1914 | at a time, prompting for the actions to take. | |
1915 | ||
675d000f RS |
1916 | --- |
1917 | ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed | |
1918 | to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate | |
1919 | bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as | |
1920 | C-c C-i b, and so on. | |
1921 | ||
cd3782b4 KS |
1922 | ** The printing package is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
1923 | ||
1924 | If you enable the printing package by including (require 'printing) in | |
1925 | the .emacs file, the normal Print item on the File menu is replaced | |
1926 | with a Print sub-menu which allows you to preview output through | |
1927 | ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript | |
1928 | printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by | |
1929 | `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information. | |
1930 | ||
66f520db | 1931 | +++ |
4e5cdb4f | 1932 | ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. |
66f520db EZ |
1933 | |
1934 | Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in | |
1935 | Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs, | |
52901be1 EZ |
1936 | type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is |
1937 | available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'. | |
66f520db | 1938 | |
10088409 | 1939 | +++ |
4e5cdb4f | 1940 | ** Tramp is now part of the distribution. |
c3d82b69 KG |
1941 | |
1942 | This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote | |
1943 | files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host, | |
1944 | Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used | |
1945 | for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for | |
1946 | the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called | |
1947 | `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell | |
1948 | connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods | |
1949 | (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or | |
1950 | `rsync' to do the copying). | |
1951 | ||
1952 | Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also | |
1953 | `su' and `sudo'. | |
1954 | ||
2a1e884e | 1955 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1956 | ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way |
49a42d13 MB |
1957 | filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so |
1958 | that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to | |
1959 | emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim, | |
1960 | invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may | |
1961 | be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'. | |
4e3dd7cf | 1962 | |
2b6bb1f2 | 1963 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1964 | ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an |
3c0fd84c GM |
1965 | "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually |
1966 | change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' | |
1967 | settings. | |
1968 | ||
2b6bb1f2 | 1969 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1970 | ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you |
a95cefd7 | 1971 | move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer. |
8a1f8073 SM |
1972 | It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts |
1973 | of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ... | |
1974 | ||
2a1e884e | 1975 | There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers. |
adb6f9dc | 1976 | |
2a1e884e | 1977 | --- |
4e5cdb4f | 1978 | ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely |
81f755ae CW |
1979 | customizable replacement for buff-menu.el. |
1980 | ||
4e5cdb4f | 1981 | ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded |
813f3d41 RS |
1982 | `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting |
1983 | these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG | |
1984 | table editing available in modern word processors. The package also | |
1985 | can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such | |
1986 | as latex and html from the visually laid out text table. | |
1987 | ||
9cc1eb89 | 1988 | +++ |
4e5cdb4f KS |
1989 | ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing |
1990 | spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command | |
1991 | letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers | |
1992 | viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values. | |
1993 | ||
2a1e884e RS |
1994 | --- |
1995 | ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed. | |
4e3dd7cf MB |
1996 | Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order |
1997 | to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display | |
1998 | mode-lines in inverse-video. | |
1999 | ||
9252f7bc | 2000 | --- |
eb6055fa | 2001 | ** cplus-md.el has been removed to avoid problems with Custom. |
a8adf791 | 2002 | |
500ae430 DL |
2003 | ** New package benchmark.el contains simple support for convenient |
2004 | timing measurements of code (including the garbage collection component). | |
2005 | ||
51a8b435 RS |
2006 | ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have |
2007 | been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used | |
2008 | in Indented-Text mode. | |
2009 | ||
2010 | ** If you set `query-replace-skip-read-only' non-nil, | |
2011 | `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore | |
2012 | a match if part of it has a read-only property. | |
2013 | ||
6b61353c KH |
2014 | ** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the apperance of fringes. |
2015 | ||
2016 | ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine | |
2017 | configuration files. | |
6c0b2643 | 2018 | \f |
d278091b | 2019 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.4 |
830047fd | 2020 | |
6b61353c KH |
2021 | ** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now |
2022 | supported on text terminals. | |
2023 | ||
2024 | ** Enhancements to stretch display properties | |
2025 | ||
2026 | The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where | |
2027 | PROPS is a property list now allows pixel based width and height | |
2028 | specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment. | |
2029 | ||
2030 | The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression | |
2031 | which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions | |
2032 | are supported: | |
2033 | ||
2034 | EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM | |
2035 | NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL | |
2036 | UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height | |
2037 | ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin | |
2038 | | scroll-bar | text | |
2039 | POS ::= left | center | right | |
2040 | FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...) | |
2041 | OP ::= + | - | |
2042 | ||
2043 | The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default | |
2044 | frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of | |
2045 | pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding | |
2046 | is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of | |
2047 | pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and | |
2048 | `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face | |
2049 | font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of | |
2050 | the image. | |
2051 | ||
2052 | The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin', | |
2053 | `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the | |
2054 | corresponding area of the window. | |
2055 | ||
2056 | The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to | |
2057 | to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge | |
2058 | of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text') | |
2059 | can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is | |
2060 | relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for | |
2061 | a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of | |
2062 | these symbols), further occurences of these symbols are interpreted as | |
2063 | the width of the area. | |
2064 | ||
2065 | For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use | |
2066 | :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin)) | |
2067 | ||
2068 | If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative | |
2069 | to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a | |
2070 | header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area. | |
2071 | ||
2072 | The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by | |
2073 | the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a | |
2074 | width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or | |
2075 | height) of the specified image. | |
2076 | ||
2077 | The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions. | |
2078 | The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions. | |
2079 | ||
2080 | ** New macro with-local-quit temporarily sets inhibit-quit to nil for use | |
2081 | around potentially blocking or long-running code in timers | |
2082 | and post-command-hooks. | |
2083 | ||
2084 | +++ | |
2085 | ** New face attribute `min-colors' can be used to tailor the face color | |
2086 | to the number of colors supported by a display, and define the | |
2087 | foreground and background colors accordingly so that they look best on | |
2088 | a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This is now the | |
2089 | preferred method for defining default faces in a way that makes a good | |
2090 | use of the capabilities of the display. | |
2091 | ||
2092 | ** New function 'define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to change the | |
2093 | built-in fringe bitmaps, as well as create new fringe bitmaps. | |
2094 | The return value is a number identifying the new fringe bitmap. | |
2095 | ||
2096 | To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and identify the | |
2097 | bitmap to change with the value of the corresponding symbol, like | |
2098 | `left-truncation-fringe-bitmap' or `continued-line-fringe-bitmap'. | |
2099 | ||
2100 | ** New function 'destroy-fringe-bitmap' may be used to destroy a | |
2101 | previously created bitmap, or restore a built-in bitmap. | |
2102 | ||
2103 | ** New function 'set-fringe-bitmap-face' can now be used to set a | |
2104 | specific face to be used for a specific fringe bitmap. Normally, | |
2105 | this should be a face derived from the `fringe' face, specifying | |
2106 | the foreground color as the desired color of the bitmap. | |
2107 | ||
2108 | ** There are new display properties, left-fringe and right-fringe, | |
2109 | that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe | |
2110 | bitmap of the display line. | |
2111 | ||
2112 | Format is 'display '(left-fringe BITMAP [FACE]), where BITMAP is a | |
2113 | number identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or as returned by | |
2114 | `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used | |
2115 | for displaying the bitmap. | |
2116 | ||
2117 | ** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns a cons (LEFT . RIGHT) | |
2118 | identifying the current fringe bitmaps in the display line at a given | |
2119 | buffer position. A nil value means no bitmap. | |
2120 | ||
2121 | ** Multiple overlay arrows can now be defined and managed via the new | |
2122 | variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'. It contains a list of | |
2123 | varibles which contain overlay arrow position markers, including | |
2124 | the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable. | |
2125 | ||
2126 | Each variable on this list may have individual `overlay-arrow-string' | |
2127 | and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow | |
2128 | string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window | |
2129 | systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position. | |
2130 | If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or | |
2131 | 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used. | |
2132 | ||
2133 | +++ | |
2134 | ** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns line number of current | |
2135 | line in current buffer, or if optional buffer position is given, line | |
2136 | number of corresponding line in current buffer. | |
2137 | ||
2138 | ** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new | |
2139 | variable `sentence-end-without-space' which contains such characters | |
2140 | that end a sentence without following spaces. | |
2141 | ||
2142 | +++ | |
2143 | ** The flags, width, and precision options for %-specifications in function | |
2144 | `format' are now documented. Some flags that were accepted but not | |
2145 | implemented (such as "*") are no longer accepted. | |
2146 | ||
2147 | ** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form. | |
2148 | It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name. | |
2149 | One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument | |
2150 | if no expansion is done, which may be tested using `eq'. | |
2151 | ||
2152 | +++ | |
2153 | ** New function `delete-dups' destructively removes `equal' duplicates | |
2154 | from a list. Of several `equal' occurrences of an element in the list, | |
2155 | the first one is kept. | |
2156 | ||
2157 | +++ | |
2158 | ** `declare' is now a macro. This change was made mostly for | |
2159 | documentation purposes and should have no real effect on Lisp code. | |
2160 | ||
2161 | ** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer' | |
2162 | before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final | |
2163 | tasks, for example; it can be used by the copyright package to make | |
2164 | sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers. | |
2165 | ||
2166 | +++ | |
2167 | ** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the | |
2168 | `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the | |
2169 | string. The old behavior is available if you call | |
2170 | `insert-for-yank-1' instead. | |
2171 | ||
2172 | ** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same | |
2173 | arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the | |
2174 | return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and | |
2175 | whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if | |
2176 | it was found as a text property or not found at all. | |
2177 | ||
2178 | ** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a | |
2179 | line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now | |
2180 | controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default | |
2181 | is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text' | |
2182 | (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'. | |
2183 | ||
2184 | ** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the | |
2185 | :pointer image property. | |
2186 | ||
2187 | ** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images may now be | |
2188 | controlled/overriden via the `pointer' text property. | |
2189 | ||
2190 | ** Images may now have an associated image map via the :map property. | |
2191 | ||
2192 | An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST). | |
2193 | An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon: | |
2194 | A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((x0 . y0) . (x1 . y1))) specifying the | |
2195 | pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners. | |
2196 | A circle is a cons (circle . ((x0 . y0) . r)) specifying the center | |
2197 | and the radius of the circle; r may be a float or integer. | |
2198 | A polygon is a cons (poly . [x0 y0 x1 y1 ...]) where each pair in the | |
2199 | vector describes one corner in the polygon. | |
2200 | ||
2201 | When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the | |
2202 | PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo' | |
2203 | property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains | |
2204 | a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when | |
2205 | it is over the hot-spot. See the variable 'void-area-text-pointer' | |
2206 | for possible pointer shapes. | |
2207 | ||
2208 | When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, | |
2209 | an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the | |
2210 | mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'. | |
2211 | ||
2212 | ** Mouse event enhancements: | |
2213 | ||
2214 | *** Mouse clicks on fringes now generates left-fringe or right-fringes | |
2215 | events, rather than a text area click event. | |
2216 | ||
2217 | *** Mouse clicks in the left and right marginal areas now includes a | |
2218 | sensible buffer position corresponding to the first character in the | |
2219 | corresponding text row. | |
2220 | ||
2221 | *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area. | |
2222 | ||
2223 | +++ | |
2224 | *** Mouse events now includes buffer position for all event types. | |
2225 | ||
2226 | +++ | |
2227 | *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events. | |
2228 | ||
2229 | +++ | |
2230 | *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means | |
2231 | text area). | |
2232 | ||
2233 | +++ | |
2234 | *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types. | |
2235 | ||
2236 | +++ | |
2237 | *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns actual glyph coordinates. | |
2238 | ||
2239 | +++ | |
2240 | *** Mouse events may now include image object in addition to string object. | |
2241 | ||
2242 | +++ | |
2243 | *** Mouse events include relative x and y pixel coordinates relative to | |
2244 | the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on. | |
2245 | ||
2246 | +++ | |
2247 | *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object | |
2248 | (image or character) clicked on. | |
2249 | ||
2250 | +++ | |
2251 | *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', and | |
2252 | 'posn-object-width-height' return the image or string object of a mouse | |
2253 | click, the x and y pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner | |
2254 | of that object, and the total width and height of that object. | |
2255 | ||
2256 | ** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of | |
2257 | one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window | |
2258 | contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit | |
2259 | changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require | |
2260 | forcing an explicit window update. | |
2261 | ||
2262 | ** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect | |
2263 | debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file. | |
2264 | ||
2265 | +++ | |
2266 | ** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if | |
2267 | the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for | |
2268 | SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is | |
2269 | nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all | |
2270 | empty matches are omitted from the returned list. | |
2271 | ||
2272 | +++ | |
2273 | ** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead. | |
2274 | ||
2275 | +++ | |
2276 | ** If optional third argument APPEND to `add-to-list' is non-nil, a | |
2277 | new element gets added at the end of the list instead of at the | |
2278 | beginning. This change actually occurred in Emacs-21.1, but was not | |
2279 | documented. | |
2280 | ||
2281 | ** Major modes can define `eldoc-print-current-symbol-info-function' | |
2282 | locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to | |
2283 | the language. | |
2284 | ||
2285 | --- | |
2286 | ** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that | |
2287 | the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text | |
2288 | parts, e.g. utf-16. | |
2289 | ||
2290 | +++ | |
2291 | ** The argument to forward-word, backward-word, forward-to-indentation | |
2292 | and backward-to-indentation is now optional, and defaults to 1. | |
2293 | ||
2294 | +++ | |
2295 | ** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able | |
2296 | to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has | |
2297 | a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to. | |
2298 | ||
2299 | Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset | |
2300 | does that, this value may not be accurate. | |
2301 | ||
51a8b435 | 2302 | +++ |
c6de56a0 RS |
2303 | ** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the |
2304 | actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or | |
2305 | divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and | |
2306 | the mode line. | |
2307 | ||
51a8b435 | 2308 | +++ |
c6de56a0 RS |
2309 | ** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges' |
2310 | return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines. | |
2311 | ||
51a8b435 | 2312 | +++ |
bf078377 SM |
2313 | ** The kill-buffer-hook is now permanent-local. |
2314 | ||
51a8b435 RS |
2315 | +++ |
2316 | ** `select-window' takes an optional second argument `norecord', like | |
2317 | `switch-to-buffer'. | |
9c0fb8b9 | 2318 | |
51a8b435 RS |
2319 | +++ |
2320 | ** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the | |
2321 | selected window without impacting the order of buffer-list. | |
2322 | ||
2323 | +++ | |
2324 | ** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and | |
2325 | text-properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it | |
2326 | works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property. | |
9c0fb8b9 | 2327 | |
51a8b435 | 2328 | +++ |
c64a682c SM |
2329 | ** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding |
2330 | in the keymap. | |
2331 | ||
51a8b435 | 2332 | --- |
c64a682c SM |
2333 | ** VC changes for backends: |
2334 | *** (vc-switches BACKEND OPERATION) is a new function for use by backends. | |
2335 | *** The new `find-version' backend function replaces the `destfile' | |
2336 | parameter of the `checkout' backend function. | |
2337 | Old code still works thanks to a default `find-version' behavior that | |
2338 | uses the old `destfile' parameter. | |
2339 | ||
51a8b435 | 2340 | +++ |
c6de56a0 RS |
2341 | ** The new macro dynamic-completion-table supports using functions |
2342 | as a dynamic completion table. | |
2343 | ||
2344 | (dynamic-completion-table FUN) | |
2345 | ||
2346 | FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required, | |
2347 | and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible | |
2348 | completions. This alist may be a full list of possible completions so that FUN | |
2349 | can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the | |
2350 | minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was | |
2351 | entered. dynamic-completion-table then computes the completion. | |
2352 | ||
51a8b435 | 2353 | +++ |
c6de56a0 RS |
2354 | ** The new macro lazy-completion-table initializes a variable |
2355 | as a lazy completion table. | |
2356 | ||
2357 | (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN &rest ARGS) | |
2358 | ||
2359 | If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR | |
2360 | as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with arguments | |
2361 | ARGS. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR. If | |
2362 | completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer | |
2363 | from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of | |
2364 | `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR. | |
2365 | ||
51a8b435 | 2366 | +++ |
5ceea398 RS |
2367 | ** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands. |
2368 | ||
e50886d3 RS |
2369 | +++ |
2370 | ** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters | |
5ceea398 RS |
2371 | for all (existing and future) frames. |
2372 | ||
51a8b435 | 2373 | +++ |
5ceea398 | 2374 | ** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP). |
052797a7 | 2375 | |
51a8b435 | 2376 | +++ |
052797a7 SM |
2377 | ** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'. |
2378 | ||
51a8b435 | 2379 | +++ |
052797a7 SM |
2380 | ** The macro `with-syntax-table' does not copy the table any more. |
2381 | ||
e50886d3 | 2382 | +++ |
211a9f6b KH |
2383 | ** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger |
2384 | (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is | |
87a4ed45 | 2385 | '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10 |
211a9f6b KH |
2386 | point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches |
2387 | SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN. | |
2388 | ||
e50886d3 | 2389 | +++ |
eb67c5d6 RS |
2390 | ** The function `number-sequence' returns a list of equally-separated |
2391 | numbers. For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). | |
2392 | By default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different separation | |
2393 | as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns (1.5 3.5 5.5). | |
2394 | ||
e50886d3 | 2395 | +++ |
5d0ab731 | 2396 | ** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which |
b0ada147 RS |
2397 | specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that |
2398 | many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link, | |
2399 | `file-chase-links' returns it anyway. | |
2400 | ||
e50886d3 | 2401 | --- |
32d0a9dc KH |
2402 | ** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on |
2403 | the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil.. | |
2404 | ||
e50886d3 | 2405 | +++ |
63a08a73 | 2406 | ** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character, |
b23375aa KS |
2407 | unless it is followed by a `-' in a character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), |
2408 | in which case it is still interpreted as the super modifier. | |
2409 | In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space. | |
2410 | ||
e50886d3 | 2411 | +++ |
ce4254bd KH |
2412 | ** New function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the multibyteness |
2413 | of a string given to a process's filter. | |
2414 | ||
e50886d3 | 2415 | +++ |
ce4254bd KH |
2416 | ** New function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns t if |
2417 | a string given to a process's filter is multibyte. | |
2418 | ||
e50886d3 | 2419 | +++ |
ce4254bd KH |
2420 | ** A filter function of a process is called with a multibyte string if |
2421 | the filter's multibyteness is t. That multibyteness is decided by the | |
2422 | value of `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is | |
2423 | created and can be changed later by `set-process-filter-multibyte'. | |
2424 | ||
e50886d3 | 2425 | +++ |
ce4254bd KH |
2426 | ** If a process's coding system is raw-text or no-conversion and its |
2427 | buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted | |
2428 | to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer. | |
2429 | Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte', | |
2430 | which was not compatible with the behaviour of file reading. | |
2431 | ||
e50886d3 | 2432 | +++ |
b08d5f59 KH |
2433 | ** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a |
2434 | multibyte string with the same individual character codes. | |
2435 | ||
e50886d3 | 2436 | +++ |
6eed9bed DL |
2437 | ** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information |
2438 | on garbage collection. | |
2439 | ||
e50886d3 | 2440 | +++ |
b08d5f59 KH |
2441 | ** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if |
2442 | it is read from a file without decoding. | |
b6c2aa59 | 2443 | |
e50886d3 RS |
2444 | +++ |
2445 | ** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information. | |
175573ac | 2446 | |
e50886d3 | 2447 | +++ |
2155ecf3 RS |
2448 | ** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window |
2449 | of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed | |
2450 | by calling `select-window'. | |
2451 | ||
e50886d3 | 2452 | --- |
2155ecf3 RS |
2453 | ** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name |
2454 | if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu | |
2455 | into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't | |
2456 | need to have a name. | |
2457 | ||
f08830d2 DL |
2458 | ** Byte compiler changes: |
2459 | ||
e50886d3 | 2460 | --- |
f08830d2 DL |
2461 | *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This |
2462 | helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both | |
2463 | Emacs and XEmacs and may sometimes make the result significantly more | |
2464 | efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't | |
2465 | generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose | |
2466 | you anything. | |
2467 | ||
e50886d3 | 2468 | +++ |
f08830d2 DL |
2469 | *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a |
2470 | simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly | |
2471 | useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.) | |
2472 | Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such | |
2473 | forms: | |
2474 | ||
2475 | (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>) | |
2476 | (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else) | |
2477 | ||
2478 | In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form | |
2479 | won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the | |
2480 | second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's | |
2481 | unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after | |
2482 | macro expansion), but such tests may be nested. Note that `when' and | |
2483 | `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't. | |
c60ee5e7 | 2484 | |
e50886d3 RS |
2485 | +++ |
2486 | *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings | |
2487 | inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'. | |
2488 | ||
2489 | +++ | |
2490 | ** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input' | |
2491 | is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to | |
2492 | be inserted is translated through it. | |
a4ac5b17 | 2493 | |
9252f7bc RS |
2494 | +++ |
2495 | ** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME), | |
a4ac5b17 | 2496 | which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the |
9252f7bc RS |
2497 | current file redefined it). |
2498 | ||
e50886d3 | 2499 | +++ |
d2d70cb6 JY |
2500 | ** New Lisp library testcover.el works with edebug to help you determine |
2501 | whether you've tested all your Lisp code. Function testcover-start | |
2502 | instruments all functions in a given file. Then test your code. Function | |
2503 | testcover-mark-all adds overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to | |
2504 | show where coverage is lacking. Command testcover-next-mark (bind it to | |
2505 | a key!) will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch. | |
2506 | ||
2507 | *** Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely evaluated; | |
2508 | a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same value. The red | |
2509 | splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly complete their evaluation, | |
2510 | such as `error'. The brown splotches are skipped for forms that are expected | |
2511 | to always evaluate to the same value, such as (setq x 14). | |
2512 | ||
2513 | *** For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to help | |
6b61353c KH |
2514 | out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a red splotch. |
2515 | It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does return. The macro 1value | |
2516 | suppresses a brown splotch for its argument. This macro is a no-op except | |
2517 | during test-coverage -- then it signals an error if the argument actually | |
2518 | returns differing values. | |
d2d70cb6 | 2519 | |
9cc1eb89 | 2520 | +++ |
d2d70cb6 JY |
2521 | ** New function unsafep returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly |
2522 | do anything dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be | |
2523 | unsafe (calls dangerous function, alters global variable, etc). | |
2524 | ||
e50886d3 RS |
2525 | +++ |
2526 | ** The new variable `print-continuous-numbering', when non-nil, says | |
2527 | that successive calls to print functions should use the same | |
2528 | numberings for circular structure references. This is only relevant | |
2529 | when `print-circle' is non-nil. | |
2530 | ||
2531 | When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should | |
2532 | also bind `print-number-table' to nil. | |
3116d142 | 2533 | |
e50886d3 | 2534 | +++ |
7c3cb37d RS |
2535 | ** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width, |
2536 | the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil. | |
2537 | ||
e50886d3 | 2538 | +++ |
7c3cb37d RS |
2539 | ** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that |
2540 | is a copy of a given abbrev table. | |
2541 | ||
21beb82f | 2542 | +++ |
add89676 RS |
2543 | ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE. |
2544 | It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they | |
21beb82f | 2545 | can start with this line: |
add89676 RS |
2546 | |
2547 | #!/usr/bin/emacs --script | |
2548 | ||
e50886d3 | 2549 | +++ |
02ce3e80 SM |
2550 | ** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on |
2551 | its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'". | |
2552 | ||
e50886d3 | 2553 | --- |
fc2938d1 DL |
2554 | ** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access |
2555 | hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'. | |
2556 | ||
e50886d3 | 2557 | +++ |
3bcd2096 JPW |
2558 | ** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional buffer |
2559 | argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted it defaults to | |
2560 | the current buffer. | |
79fab26b | 2561 | |
6b61353c | 2562 | +++ |
56592beb RS |
2563 | ** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn' |
2564 | and `display-warning'. | |
2565 | ||
e50886d3 | 2566 | +++ |
a7bd9dc7 SM |
2567 | ** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists |
2568 | of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays | |
2569 | and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now | |
2570 | exported to Lisp. | |
2571 | ||
e50886d3 | 2572 | --- |
1c6576ab RS |
2573 | ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how |
2574 | much pure storage it will approximately need. | |
2575 | ||
e50886d3 | 2576 | +++ |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
2577 | ** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions |
2578 | to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system | |
2579 | for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific | |
2580 | file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.) | |
2581 | ||
e50886d3 | 2582 | --- |
cc305a60 RS |
2583 | ** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects |
2584 | of one coding system from another coding system. | |
2585 | ||
6b61353c | 2586 | +++ |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
2587 | ** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that |
2588 | are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables | |
2589 | specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating | |
2590 | such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is | |
2591 | needed. | |
2592 | ||
6b61353c | 2593 | --- |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
2594 | ** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property, |
2595 | that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it | |
2596 | appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property | |
2597 | is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is | |
2598 | ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called | |
2599 | with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call. | |
2600 | ||
2601 | If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for | |
2602 | confirmation as before. | |
2603 | ||
6b61353c | 2604 | +++ |
6f8968c8 | 2605 | ** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths. |
2b6bb1f2 | 2606 | |
6f8968c8 KS |
2607 | The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame |
2608 | can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe' | |
2609 | frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels. | |
2610 | Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe. | |
2b6bb1f2 | 2611 | |
6f8968c8 KS |
2612 | The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the |
2613 | specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an | |
2614 | integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly | |
2615 | between the left and right fringe. For force a specific fringe width, | |
2616 | specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative, | |
2617 | only the left fringe gets the specified width). | |
2b6bb1f2 RS |
2618 | |
2619 | Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe | |
2620 | width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any | |
2621 | of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in | |
2622 | fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels. | |
2623 | ||
6b61353c | 2624 | +++ |
6f8968c8 KS |
2625 | ** Per-window fringes settings |
2626 | ||
2627 | Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and position | |
2628 | settings. | |
2629 | ||
2630 | To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local | |
2631 | variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call | |
2632 | `set-window-fringes'. | |
2633 | ||
2634 | To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes | |
2635 | are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area, | |
2636 | or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable | |
2637 | `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'. | |
2638 | ||
2639 | The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current | |
2640 | settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and | |
2641 | `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before | |
2642 | displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force | |
2643 | an update of the display margins. | |
2644 | ||
6b61353c | 2645 | +++ |
6f8968c8 KS |
2646 | ** Per-window vertical scroll-bar settings |
2647 | ||
2648 | Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings | |
2649 | controlling the width and position of scroll-bars. | |
2650 | ||
2651 | To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local | |
2652 | variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call | |
2653 | `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be | |
2654 | used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and | |
2655 | `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
2656 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
2657 | of the display margins. | |
2658 | ||
6b61353c | 2659 | +++ |
6f8968c8 KS |
2660 | ** The function `set-window-buffer' now has an optional third argument |
2661 | KEEP-MARGINS which will preserve the window's current margin, fringe, | |
2662 | and scroll-bar settings if non-nil. | |
2663 | ||
f2aa473a | 2664 | +++ |
2881ae98 SM |
2665 | ** Renamed file hooks to follow the convention: |
2666 | find-file-hooks to find-file-hook, | |
2667 | find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions, | |
2668 | write-file-hooks to write-file-functions, | |
2669 | write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions. | |
2670 | Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'). | |
2671 | ||
6b61353c | 2672 | +++ |
c60ee5e7 | 2673 | ** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'. |
7757cdaf JPW |
2674 | It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old |
2675 | name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete. | |
2676 | ||
6b61353c | 2677 | +++ |
02f20f98 KS |
2678 | ** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which |
2679 | specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The | |
2680 | new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument | |
2681 | while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this | |
2682 | variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list. | |
2683 | ||
6b61353c | 2684 | --- |
02f20f98 KS |
2685 | ** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by lisp code |
2686 | to override the internal read-file-name function. | |
2687 | ||
6b61353c | 2688 | +++ |
21b6d966 KS |
2689 | ** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of |
2690 | `read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion | |
2691 | will only show directories. | |
2692 | ||
6b61353c | 2693 | +++ |
af7272b1 RS |
2694 | ** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns |
2695 | non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using | |
2696 | its own special methods and not directly through the file system). | |
2697 | ||
6b61353c | 2698 | --- |
af7272b1 RS |
2699 | ** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file |
2700 | now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs | |
2701 | (require 'cl) when loaded. | |
2702 | ||
6b61353c | 2703 | +++ |
ee9e0c25 GM |
2704 | ** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to |
2705 | indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The | |
2706 | syntax of defmacro has been extended to | |
2707 | ||
2708 | (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...) | |
2709 | ||
2710 | DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The | |
2711 | declaration specifiers supported are: | |
2712 | ||
2713 | (indent INDENT) | |
2714 | Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT. | |
2715 | ||
2716 | (edebug DEBUG) | |
2717 | Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is | |
2718 | equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro. | |
2719 | ||
6b61353c | 2720 | +++ |
93607efd KS |
2721 | ** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps. |
2722 | ||
2723 | This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition | |
dfd67a62 | 2724 | to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap |
93607efd KS |
2725 | binding and lookup functionality. |
2726 | ||
2727 | When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is | |
2728 | remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the | |
2729 | original command. | |
2730 | ||
2731 | Example: | |
2732 | Suppose that minor mode my-mode has defined the commands | |
2733 | my-kill-line and my-kill-word, and it wants C-k (and any other key | |
2734 | bound to kill-line) to run the command my-kill-line instead of | |
2735 | kill-line, and likewise it wants to run my-kill-word instead of | |
2736 | kill-word. | |
2737 | ||
2738 | Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map, | |
2739 | command remapping allows you to directly map kill-line into | |
2740 | my-kill-line and kill-word into my-kill-word through the minor mode | |
2741 | map using define-key: | |
2742 | ||
a8959ac2 KS |
2743 | (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line) |
2744 | (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word) | |
93607efd KS |
2745 | |
2746 | Now, when my-mode is enabled, and the user enters C-k or M-d, | |
2747 | the commands my-kill-line and my-kill-word are run. | |
2748 | ||
2749 | Notice that only one level of remapping is supported. In the above | |
2750 | example, this means that if my-kill-line is remapped to other-kill, | |
2751 | then C-k still runs my-kill-line. | |
2752 | ||
2753 | The following changes have been made to provide command remapping: | |
2754 | ||
a8959ac2 KS |
2755 | - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key |
2756 | `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD | |
2757 | to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to | |
2758 | another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding. | |
93607efd | 2759 | |
a84db054 KS |
2760 | - The new function `command-remapping' returns the binding for a |
2761 | remapped command in the current keymaps, or nil if not remapped. | |
93607efd KS |
2762 | |
2763 | - key-binding now remaps interactive commands unless the optional | |
a8959ac2 | 2764 | third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil. |
93607efd KS |
2765 | |
2766 | - where-is-internal now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g. | |
2767 | kill-line if my-mode is enabled), and the actual key binding for | |
2768 | the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line). | |
2769 | It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits | |
2770 | remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns C-k for kill-line and | |
2771 | <kill-line> for my-kill-line). | |
2772 | ||
2773 | - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original | |
2774 | command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the | |
2775 | command was not remapped. | |
2776 | ||
6b61353c | 2777 | +++ |
3f21fb3a KS |
2778 | ** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists. |
2779 | ||
2780 | Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own | |
2781 | keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap | |
2782 | alist to this list. | |
2783 | ||
6b61353c | 2784 | +++ |
108eaabb RS |
2785 | ** Atomic change groups. |
2786 | ||
2787 | To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that | |
2788 | they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group' | |
2789 | around the code that makes changes. For instance: | |
2790 | ||
2791 | (atomic-change-group | |
2792 | (insert foo) | |
2793 | (delete-region x y)) | |
2794 | ||
2795 | If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of | |
2796 | `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that | |
2797 | were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect | |
2798 | on any other buffers--any such changes remain. | |
2799 | ||
2800 | If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the | |
2801 | lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how. | |
2802 | ||
2803 | To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'. | |
2804 | Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer. | |
2805 | This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save | |
2806 | the handle to activate the change group and then finish it. | |
2807 | ||
2808 | Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change | |
2809 | group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to | |
2810 | do this. | |
2811 | ||
2812 | After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can | |
2813 | either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call | |
2814 | `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final; | |
2815 | call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all. | |
2816 | ||
2817 | You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always | |
2818 | finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the | |
2819 | `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs. | |
2820 | (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and | |
2821 | `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the | |
2822 | group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group | |
2823 | twice. | |
2824 | ||
2825 | To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once | |
2826 | for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the | |
2827 | returned values, like this: | |
2828 | ||
2829 | (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1) | |
2830 | (prepare-change-group buffer-2)) | |
2831 | ||
2832 | You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call | |
2833 | to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to | |
2834 | `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'. | |
2835 | ||
2836 | Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you | |
2837 | would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer | |
2838 | will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first | |
2839 | change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one | |
2840 | finished. | |
2841 | ||
f17c0a19 CW |
2842 | +++ |
2843 | ** New variable char-property-alias-alist. | |
2844 | ||
2845 | This variable allows you to create alternative names for text | |
2846 | properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties', | |
2847 | although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced | |
2848 | to implement the `font-lock-face' property. | |
2849 | ||
6b61353c | 2850 | +++ |
f17c0a19 CW |
2851 | ** New special text property `font-lock-face'. |
2852 | ||
2853 | This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by | |
2854 | M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text | |
2855 | property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the | |
2856 | new variable `char-property-alias-alist'. | |
2857 | ||
6b61353c | 2858 | +++ |
d9f7eb77 RS |
2859 | ** New function remove-list-of-text-properties. |
2860 | ||
2861 | The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties' is almost the same | |
2862 | as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes | |
2863 | a list of property names as argument rather than a property list. | |
2864 | ||
6b61353c | 2865 | +++ |
18232c16 | 2866 | ** New function insert-for-yank. |
d278091b | 2867 | |
18232c16 KS |
2868 | This function normally works like `insert' but removes the text |
2869 | properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. However, if the | |
2870 | inserted text has a `yank-handler' text property on the first | |
2871 | character of the string, the insertion of the text may be modified in | |
2872 | a number of ways. See the description of `yank-handler' below. | |
2873 | ||
6b61353c | 2874 | +++ |
18232c16 KS |
2875 | ** New function insert-buffer-substring-as-yank. |
2876 | ||
2877 | This function works like `insert-buffer-substring', but removes the | |
2878 | text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. | |
d278091b | 2879 | |
6b61353c | 2880 | +++ |
d278091b KS |
2881 | ** New function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties. |
2882 | ||
18232c16 KS |
2883 | This function is like insert-buffer-substring, but removes all |
2884 | text properties from the inserted substring. | |
2885 | ||
6b61353c | 2886 | +++ |
18232c16 KS |
2887 | ** New `yank-handler' text property may be used to control how |
2888 | previously killed text on the kill-ring is reinserted. | |
2889 | ||
6b61353c | 2890 | The value of the yank-handler property must be a list with one to four |
18232c16 | 2891 | elements with the following format: |
a6098104 | 2892 | (FUNCTION PARAM NOEXCLUDE UNDO). |
18232c16 KS |
2893 | |
2894 | The `insert-for-yank' function looks for a yank-handler property on | |
2895 | the first character on its string argument (typically the first | |
2896 | element on the kill-ring). If a yank-handler property is found, | |
2897 | the normal behaviour of `insert-for-yank' is modified in various ways: | |
2898 | ||
2899 | When FUNCTION is present and non-nil, it is called instead of `insert' | |
2900 | to insert the string. FUNCTION takes one argument--the object to insert. | |
2901 | If PARAM is present and non-nil, it replaces STRING as the object | |
2902 | passed to FUNCTION (or `insert'); for example, if FUNCTION is | |
2903 | `yank-rectangle', PARAM should be a list of strings to insert as a | |
2904 | rectangle. | |
2905 | If NOEXCLUDE is present and non-nil, the normal removal of the | |
2906 | yank-excluded-properties is not performed; instead FUNCTION is | |
2907 | responsible for removing those properties. This may be necessary | |
2908 | if FUNCTION adjusts point before or after inserting the object. | |
2909 | If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called | |
2910 | by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is | |
c60ee5e7 | 2911 | called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region. |
18232c16 | 2912 | FUNCTION may set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value. |
18232c16 | 2913 | |
6b61353c KH |
2914 | *** The functions kill-new, kill-append, and kill-region now have an |
2915 | optional argument to specify the yank-handler text property to put on | |
2916 | the killed text. | |
18232c16 KS |
2917 | |
2918 | *** The function yank-pop will now use a non-nil value of the variable | |
2919 | `yank-undo-function' (instead of delete-region) to undo the previous | |
2920 | yank or yank-pop command (or a call to insert-for-yank). The function | |
2921 | insert-for-yank automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO | |
2922 | element of the string argument's yank-handler text property if present. | |
2923 | ||
6b61353c | 2924 | +++ |
11ef2a3b MB |
2925 | ** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test |
2926 | whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable. | |
2927 | ||
2928 | A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face | |
2929 | specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces | |
2930 | defined with defface. | |
2931 | ||
6b61353c | 2932 | +++ |
3d619ea1 MB |
2933 | ** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now |
2934 | accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face | |
2935 | inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute. | |
2936 | ||
6b61353c | 2937 | +++ |
3d619ea1 MB |
2938 | ** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute |
2939 | help with handling relative face attributes. | |
2940 | ||
6b61353c | 2941 | +++ |
15aeeda5 KS |
2942 | ** Enhancements to process support |
2943 | ||
2944 | *** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil, | |
2945 | only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set are listed. | |
2946 | ||
2947 | *** New set-process-query-on-exit-flag and process-query-on-exit-flag | |
2948 | functions. The existing process-kill-without-query function is still | |
2949 | supported, but new code should use the new functions. | |
2950 | ||
2951 | *** Function signal-process now accepts a process object or process | |
2952 | name in addition to a process id to identify the signalled process. | |
2953 | ||
e519464c | 2954 | *** Processes now have an associated property list where programs can |
c60ee5e7 | 2955 | maintain process state and other per-process related information. |
e519464c KS |
2956 | |
2957 | The new functions process-get and process-put are used to access, add, | |
2958 | and modify elements on this property list. | |
2959 | ||
2960 | The new low-level functions process-plist and set-process-plist are | |
2961 | used to access and replace the entire property list of a process. | |
2962 | ||
6b61353c KH |
2963 | ??? |
2964 | *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output. | |
15aeeda5 | 2965 | |
6b61353c KH |
2966 | On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the |
2967 | output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in | |
2968 | very poor performance. This behaviour can be remedied to some extent | |
2969 | by setting the new variable process-adaptive-read-buffering to a | |
2970 | non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading | |
2971 | from such processes, to allowing them to produce more output before | |
2972 | emacs tries to read it. | |
2973 | ||
2974 | +++ | |
fd13a3cc | 2975 | ** Enhanced networking support. |
1e892206 | 2976 | |
fd13a3cc KS |
2977 | *** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports |
2978 | opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as | |
2979 | create a stream or datagram server inside emacs. | |
1e892206 | 2980 | |
fd13a3cc | 2981 | - A server is started using :server t arg. |
60a501d7 | 2982 | - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg. |
fd13a3cc KS |
2983 | - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg. |
2984 | - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg. | |
2985 | - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg. | |
e519464c KS |
2986 | - The process' property list may be initialized using :plist PLIST arg; |
2987 | a copy of the server process' property list is automatically inherited | |
2988 | by new client processes created to handle incoming connections. | |
1e892206 | 2989 | |
60a501d7 KS |
2990 | To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this: |
2991 | (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram)) | |
2992 | ||
fd13a3cc KS |
2993 | *** Original open-network-stream is now emulated using make-network-process. |
2994 | ||
2995 | *** New function open-network-stream-nowait. | |
2996 | ||
2997 | This function initiates a non-blocking connect and returns immediately | |
8e9e520b KS |
2998 | without waiting for the connection to be established. It takes the |
2999 | filter and sentinel functions as arguments; when the non-blocking | |
3000 | connect completes, the sentinel is called with a status string | |
3001 | matching "open" or "failed". | |
fd13a3cc KS |
3002 | |
3003 | *** New function open-network-stream-server. | |
8e9e520b KS |
3004 | |
3005 | This function creates a network server process for a TCP service. | |
3006 | When a client connects to the specified service, a new subprocess | |
3007 | is created to handle the new connection, and the sentinel function | |
3008 | is called for the new process. | |
fd13a3cc KS |
3009 | |
3010 | *** New functions process-datagram-address and set-process-datagram-address. | |
8e9e520b KS |
3011 | |
3012 | These functions are used with datagram-based network processes to get | |
3013 | and set the current address of the remote partner. | |
fd13a3cc | 3014 | |
4e5cdb4f | 3015 | *** New function format-network-address. |
8e9e520b KS |
3016 | |
3017 | This function reformats the lisp representation of a network address | |
3018 | to a printable string. For example, an IP address A.B.C.D and port | |
3019 | number P is represented as a five element vector [A B C D P], and the | |
3020 | printable string returned for this vector is "A.B.C.D:P". See the doc | |
3021 | string for other formatting options. | |
4e5cdb4f | 3022 | |
fd13a3cc KS |
3023 | *** By default, the function process-contact still returns (HOST SERVICE) |
3024 | for a network process. Using the new optional KEY arg, the complete list | |
3025 | of network process properties or a specific property can be selected. | |
3026 | ||
3027 | Using :local and :remote as the KEY, the address of the local or | |
3028 | remote end-point is returned. An Inet address is represented as a 5 | |
3029 | element vector, where the first 4 elements contain the IP address and | |
3030 | the fifth is the port number. | |
3031 | ||
3032 | *** Network processes can now be stopped and restarted with | |
3033 | `stop-process' and `continue-process'. For a server process, no | |
3034 | connections are accepted in the stopped state. For a client process, | |
3035 | no input is received in the stopped state. | |
3036 | ||
6b61353c KH |
3037 | *** New function network-interface-list. |
3038 | ||
3039 | This function returns a list of network interface names and their | |
3040 | current network addresses. | |
3041 | ||
3042 | *** New function network-interface-info. | |
3043 | ||
3044 | This function returns the network address, hardware address, current | |
3045 | status, and other information about a specific network interface. | |
3046 | ||
3047 | +++ | |
6ba3d6bc CW |
3048 | ** New function copy-tree. |
3049 | ||
6b61353c | 3050 | +++ |
9ade4a7d RS |
3051 | ** New function substring-no-properties. |
3052 | ||
6b61353c | 3053 | +++ |
3bdb7f80 KS |
3054 | ** New function minibuffer-selected-window. |
3055 | ||
6b61353c | 3056 | +++ |
4e3dd7cf MB |
3057 | ** New function `call-process-shell-command'. |
3058 | ||
6b61353c | 3059 | --- |
f6078b98 RS |
3060 | ** The dummy function keys made by easymenu |
3061 | are now always lower case. If you specify the | |
3062 | menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada' | |
3063 | as the "key" bound by that key binding. | |
3064 | ||
3065 | This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for | |
3066 | the bindings that were made with easymenu. | |
3067 | ||
6b61353c | 3068 | +++ |
f6078b98 RS |
3069 | ** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional |
3070 | argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks | |
3071 | for a function that could be called with `call-interactively', | |
3072 | and does not return t for keyboard macros. | |
3073 | ||
6b61353c | 3074 | --- |
2a1e884e RS |
3075 | ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave |
3076 | buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. | |
3077 | ||
3078 | It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master | |
3079 | and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi | |
3080 | buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the | |
3081 | commands. | |
3082 | ||
3083 | This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable | |
3084 | sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the | |
3085 | SQL buffer. | |
3086 | ||
3087 | (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook | |
3088 | (function (lambda () | |
3089 | (master-mode t) | |
3090 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) | |
3091 | (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook | |
3092 | (function (lambda () | |
3093 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) | |
3094 | ||
6b61353c | 3095 | +++ |
596d02bc RS |
3096 | ** File local variables. |
3097 | ||
3098 | A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text | |
3099 | properties--any specified text properties are discarded. | |
3100 | ||
d33c4505 RS |
3101 | +++ |
3102 | ** New function window-body-height. | |
3103 | ||
3104 | This is like window-height but does not count the mode line | |
3105 | or the header line. | |
3106 | ||
6b61353c | 3107 | +++ |
21b6d966 KS |
3108 | ** New function format-mode-line. |
3109 | ||
3110 | This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a | |
f4d7915c | 3111 | specified) window as a string with or without text properties. |
21b6d966 | 3112 | |
6b61353c | 3113 | +++ |
9356fe5a RS |
3114 | ** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'. |
3115 | ||
3116 | These functions are like `plist-get' and `plist-put' except that they | |
3117 | compare the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'. | |
3118 | ||
6b61353c | 3119 | +++ |
4f4fada2 RS |
3120 | ** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu' |
3121 | ||
9252f7bc | 3122 | The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' must not be used (as previously |
4f4fada2 RS |
3123 | recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps. |
3124 | Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets | |
3125 | you specify the map to use as an argument. | |
3126 | ||
c4f59bcf EZ |
3127 | +++ |
3128 | ** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument. | |
3129 | ||
3130 | When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the | |
3131 | angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is | |
3132 | equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.) | |
3133 | ||
75e20bec RS |
3134 | +++ |
3135 | ** You can now make a window as short as one line. | |
3136 | ||
3137 | A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode | |
3138 | line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and | |
3139 | `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall | |
3140 | cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the | |
3141 | variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears. | |
3142 | ||
e0c124ce EZ |
3143 | +++ |
3144 | ** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use | |
3145 | for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a | |
3146 | number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp | |
3147 | Reference manual for more detailed documentation. | |
3148 | ||
6b61353c KH |
3149 | +++ |
3150 | ** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be | |
3151 | used to add text properties to mode-line elements. | |
3152 | ||
3153 | +++ | |
3154 | ** Mode line display ignores text properties as well as the | |
3155 | :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose | |
3156 | `risky-local-variable' property is nil. | |
3157 | ||
3158 | +++ | |
3159 | ** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used | |
3160 | to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode | |
3161 | line. | |
596d02bc | 3162 | |
1c6576ab RS |
3163 | --- |
3164 | ** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the | |
3165 | cl-indent package. The new user options | |
3166 | `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and | |
3167 | `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the | |
3168 | indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms. | |
3169 | ||
3170 | --- | |
3171 | ** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the | |
3172 | cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'. | |
3173 | ||
6b61353c | 3174 | +++ |
aaddfb29 RS |
3175 | ** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough: |
3176 | ||
3177 | Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes | |
3178 | from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte | |
3179 | buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them | |
3180 | now: | |
3181 | ||
3182 | 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time. | |
3183 | ||
3184 | 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid | |
3185 | the time it takes to convert the format. | |
3186 | ||
3187 | 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and | |
3188 | wasteful. | |
3189 | ||
6b61353c | 3190 | +++ |
edde72f6 RS |
3191 | ** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence |
3192 | over minor mode keymaps. | |
3193 | ||
6b61353c | 3194 | +++ |
0065bb74 RS |
3195 | ** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte. |
3196 | An octal escape makes it unibyte. | |
3197 | ||
6b61353c | 3198 | +++ |
5ceea398 RS |
3199 | ** At the end of a command, point moves out from within invisible |
3200 | text, in the same way it moves out from within text covered by an | |
3201 | image or composition property. | |
3202 | ||
c64a682c SM |
3203 | This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible. |
3204 | This is particularly good because the intangible property often has | |
3205 | unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything | |
3206 | (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after | |
3207 | post-command-hook and thus does not care about intermediate states. | |
5d0ab731 | 3208 | |
51a8b435 | 3209 | +++ |
bf36a6d3 MB |
3210 | ** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional |
3211 | argument, LIMIT. | |
4e02881b | 3212 | |
ef8aee62 | 3213 | +++ |
1b8c66fe RS |
3214 | ** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If |
3215 | non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that | |
3216 | it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs. | |
3217 | Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this | |
3218 | flag. | |
3219 | ||
51a8b435 | 3220 | --- |
c95eaa61 PJ |
3221 | ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed. |
3222 | ||
51a8b435 | 3223 | --- |
c95eaa61 PJ |
3224 | ** The function insert-string is now obsolete. |
3225 | ||
51a8b435 | 3226 | --- |
111ed14e SM |
3227 | ** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed. |
3228 | Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches, | |
3229 | find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler | |
3230 | that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the | |
3231 | handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. | |
3232 | In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies. | |
3233 | ||
51a8b435 | 3234 | --- |
cfaa4a1b | 3235 | ** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly. |
59b59892 SM |
3236 | Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key |
3237 | bindings of the parent keymap. | |
cfaa4a1b | 3238 | |
51a8b435 | 3239 | --- |
f67cc62e SM |
3240 | ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'. |
3241 | If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified | |
3242 | (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will | |
3243 | be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element | |
3244 | depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline | |
3245 | is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl: | |
3246 | ||
3247 | s{ | |
3248 | foo | |
3249 | }{ | |
3250 | bar | |
3251 | }e | |
3252 | ||
3253 | Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of | |
3254 | text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline | |
3255 | property over the second half of the command to force (deferred) | |
3256 | refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed. | |
3257 | ||
51a8b435 | 3258 | --- |
6710ea06 | 3259 | ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is |
fbe51115 | 3260 | called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'. |
6710ea06 | 3261 | |
16927a56 | 3262 | ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group |
6b61353c | 3263 | (the last prior group defined in the same file) when no :group was given. |
16927a56 | 3264 | |
51a8b435 | 3265 | +++ |
16927a56 SM |
3266 | ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when |
3267 | it receives a request from emacsclient. | |
3268 | ||
51a8b435 | 3269 | --- |
8727d588 RS |
3270 | ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted. |
3271 | Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more | |
3272 | than 3 levels of nesting. | |
3273 | ||
51a8b435 | 3274 | --- |
1c1d3d69 RS |
3275 | ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect' |
3276 | property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use | |
3277 | it in that buffer. | |
3278 | ||
51a8b435 | 3279 | --- |
ae4000f1 | 3280 | ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits |
1ff74324 | 3281 | properties from surrounding text. |
1c1d3d69 | 3282 | |
51a8b435 | 3283 | +++ |
830047fd RS |
3284 | ** New function `buffer-local-value'. |
3285 | ||
830047fd RS |
3286 | This function returns the buffer-local binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) |
3287 | in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not have a buffer-local binding in | |
3288 | buffer BUFFER, it returns the default value of VARIABLE instead. | |
6c0b2643 | 3289 | |
51a8b435 | 3290 | --- |
8e8223e2 SM |
3291 | ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text |
3292 | that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one | |
3293 | clone to the other. | |
3294 | ||
51a8b435 | 3295 | +++ |
8e8223e2 SM |
3296 | ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'. |
3297 | *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list | |
d390f4aa | 3298 | of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set |
8e8223e2 SM |
3299 | other properties than `face'. |
3300 | *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra | |
3301 | properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock. | |
3302 | ||
51a8b435 | 3303 | --- |
0df7a0b6 EZ |
3304 | ** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR' |
3305 | or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the | |
51a8b435 RS |
3306 | `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use |
3307 | the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background | |
3308 | directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face. | |
0df7a0b6 | 3309 | |
51a8b435 | 3310 | +++ |
8e8223e2 SM |
3311 | ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks' |
3312 | are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the | |
3313 | parent mode is run at the end of the child mode. | |
3314 | ||
51a8b435 | 3315 | +++ |
0ec6b206 SM |
3316 | ** define-minor-mode now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments |
3317 | and simply passes them to defcustom, if applicable. | |
3318 | ||
51a8b435 | 3319 | +++ |
7c3cb37d RS |
3320 | ** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table. |
3321 | It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table. | |
3322 | ||
a7bd9dc7 | 3323 | +++ |
8e8223e2 SM |
3324 | ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument |
3325 | to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist' | |
7bea57c9 | 3326 | and runs any code associated with the provided feature. |
8e8223e2 | 3327 | |
202082d3 EZ |
3328 | +++ |
3329 | ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now | |
3330 | ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as | |
3331 | `.emacs' are treated as extensionless. | |
3332 | ||
51a8b435 | 3333 | +++ |
63ca0a6e GM |
3334 | ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the |
3335 | user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name' | |
3336 | accepts a float as UID parameter. | |
3337 | ||
51a8b435 | 3338 | --- |
30de4b24 SM |
3339 | ** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1. |
3340 | ||
51a8b435 | 3341 | +++ |
30de4b24 SM |
3342 | ** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed. |
3343 | ||
51a8b435 | 3344 | +++ |
1c6576ab RS |
3345 | ** The Emacs Lisp byte-compiler now displays the actual line and |
3346 | character position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form | |
3347 | of its warning and error messages have been brought more in line with | |
3348 | the output of other GNU tools. | |
3349 | ||
51a8b435 | 3350 | +++ |
026f408d SM |
3351 | ** New functions `keymap-prompt' and `current-active-maps'. |
3352 | ||
51a8b435 | 3353 | --- |
026f408d SM |
3354 | ** New function `describe-buffer-bindings'. |
3355 | ||
51a8b435 | 3356 | +++ |
026f408d SM |
3357 | ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when |
3358 | searching for an executable resp. an elisp file. | |
3359 | ||
51a8b435 | 3360 | +++ |
cb8d4d07 | 3361 | ** Variable aliases have been implemented: |
6c0b2643 | 3362 | |
51a8b435 | 3363 | *** defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING] |
6c0b2643 | 3364 | |
3fdb4c50 JB |
3365 | This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for |
3366 | symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
3367 | returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR | |
3368 | changes the value of BASE-VAR. | |
6c0b2643 | 3369 | |
32ebbc3a JB |
3370 | DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has |
3371 | the same documentation as BASE-VAR. | |
3372 | ||
51a8b435 | 3373 | *** indirect-variable VARIABLE |
6c0b2643 GM |
3374 | |
3375 | This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases | |
3376 | of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not | |
3377 | defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE. | |
3378 | ||
3379 | It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of | |
3380 | variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables. | |
3381 | ||
51a8b435 | 3382 | +++ |
6c0b2643 GM |
3383 | ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage |
3384 | collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care. | |
3385 | ||
51a8b435 | 3386 | +++ |
ace64e0a GM |
3387 | ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory, |
3388 | the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error. | |
3389 | ||
51a8b435 | 3390 | +++ |
123ac55e | 3391 | ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum |
51a8b435 | 3392 | hold the largest and smallest possible integer values. |
123ac55e | 3393 | |
51a8b435 | 3394 | --- |
0b559506 JR |
3395 | ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS. |
3396 | The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was | |
3397 | formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system. | |
3398 | ||
51a8b435 RS |
3399 | ** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-key-sequence and the like, that |
3400 | display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt | |
6b3daede GM |
3401 | using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string. |
3402 | ||
6b61353c KH |
3403 | ** New function x-send-client-message sends a client message when |
3404 | running under X. | |
3405 | ||
30de4b24 SM |
3406 | ** New packages: |
3407 | ||
71c88486 NR |
3408 | *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to |
3409 | GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but | |
3410 | there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the | |
3411 | state of your program. It separates the input/output of your program from | |
6b61353c KH |
3412 | that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of |
3413 | Emacs 21 such as the display margin for breakpoints, and the toolbar. | |
71c88486 NR |
3414 | |
3415 | Use M-x gdba to start GDB-UI. | |
3416 | ||
30de4b24 SM |
3417 | *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the |
3418 | current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp). | |
3419 | ||
ffe5000a KS |
3420 | *** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack |
3421 | binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp | |
3422 | data structures. | |
3423 | ||
e95768c5 | 3424 | *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el. |
c494f663 CW |
3425 | This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented. |
3426 | ||
4e3dd7cf MB |
3427 | *** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons' |
3428 | in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets' | |
3429 | implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't | |
3430 | require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things | |
3431 | as help and apropos buffers. | |
3432 | ||
6c0b2643 | 3433 | \f |
71c88486 NR |
3434 | * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3 |
3435 | ||
3436 | ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has | |
3437 | been added. | |
3438 | ||
3439 | \f | |
3440 | * Changes in Emacs 21.3 | |
3441 | ||
3442 | ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems | |
3443 | with Custom. | |
3444 | ||
3445 | ** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters | |
3446 | as mule-utf-8. Coding system `utf-16-le-dos' is useful as the value | |
3447 | of `selection-coding-system' in MS Windows, allowing you to paste | |
3448 | multilingual text from the clipboard. Set it interactively with | |
3449 | C-x RET x or in .emacs with `(set-selection-coding-system 'utf-16-le-dos)'. | |
3450 | ||
3451 | ** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically | |
3452 | in UTF-8 locales). | |
3453 | ||
3454 | ** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in | |
3455 | different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the | |
3456 | Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' | |
3457 | and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation | |
3458 | between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding | |
3459 | (e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that | |
3460 | `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but | |
3461 | `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read | |
3462 | it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable. | |
3463 | By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on. | |
3464 | ||
3465 | ** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of | |
3466 | `selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'. | |
3467 | ||
3468 | If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to | |
3469 | compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using | |
3470 | compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding | |
3471 | text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behaviour is actually | |
3472 | contrary to the compound text specification. | |
3473 | ||
3474 | \f | |
3475 | * Installation changes in Emacs 21.2 | |
3476 | ||
3477 | ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added. | |
3478 | ||
3479 | ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added. | |
3480 | ||
3481 | \f | |
3482 | * Changes in Emacs 21.2 | |
3483 | ||
3484 | ** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections. | |
3485 | ||
3486 | X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in | |
3487 | compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the | |
3488 | list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste | |
3489 | selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system | |
3490 | compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system. | |
3491 | ||
3492 | ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay' | |
3493 | were changed. | |
3494 | ||
3495 | ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs | |
3496 | now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode. | |
3497 | ||
3498 | ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from | |
3499 | initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode, | |
3500 | instead of using default-major-mode. | |
3501 | ||
3502 | ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave | |
3503 | like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far | |
3504 | as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t | |
3505 | (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it | |
3506 | visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option | |
3507 | is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes | |
3508 | to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does. | |
3509 | ||
3510 | This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the | |
3511 | NEWS. | |
3512 | ||
3513 | \f | |
3514 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2 | |
3515 | ||
3516 | ** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively | |
3517 | have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up, | |
3518 | and the latter now controls scrolling down. | |
3519 | ||
3520 | ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can | |
3521 | be used to transform filenames found in compilation output. | |
3522 | ||
3523 | \f | |
251584f3 DL |
3524 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
3525 | ||
889be0a1 DL |
3526 | See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
3527 | fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra | |
3528 | charsets in this release. | |
3529 | ||
f4988be7 GM |
3530 | ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
3531 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
3532 | ** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
3533 | ||
1fa28578 | 3534 | ** There are new configure options associated with the support for |
163ea954 RS |
3535 | images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
3536 | to list them. | |
6344985d | 3537 | |
5ed8d5af | 3538 | ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
60dd7e0e | 3539 | support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
8628686a DL |
3540 | maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
3541 | build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any | |
3542 | necessary changes to unexec. | |
f4988be7 | 3543 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3544 | ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
3545 | Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. | |
3546 | ||
3547 | ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs | |
3548 | Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. | |
3549 | ||
3550 | ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using | |
3551 | the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
d9c9b920 | 3552 | |
e90813b8 | 3553 | ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
a7c13351 | 3554 | all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
d69aa2e3 EZ |
3555 | lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
3556 | "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the | |
3557 | description of aspects specific to the Mac. | |
d9c9b920 | 3558 | |
efeb796b EZ |
3559 | ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
3560 | new display features described below. | |
3561 | ||
05197f40 | 3562 | \f |
1fa28578 GM |
3563 | * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
3564 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3565 | ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
3566 | ||
3567 | The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
3568 | Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
3569 | oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
3570 | of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
3571 | the text. | |
3572 | ||
3573 | ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
3574 | ||
3575 | The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
3576 | font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
3577 | height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
3578 | These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
3579 | specify a font. | |
3580 | ||
3581 | Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
3582 | These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
3583 | under Lisp changes, below. | |
3584 | ||
3585 | ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
3586 | ||
3587 | Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
3588 | Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
3589 | the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
3590 | italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
3591 | Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
3592 | attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored | |
3593 | on terminals. | |
3594 | ||
3595 | The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now | |
3596 | supported on character terminals. | |
3597 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3598 | Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of |
3599 | the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the | |
3600 | same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on | |
3601 | a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option. | |
3602 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3603 | ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. |
3604 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3605 | ** Sound support |
3606 | ||
3607 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware | |
3608 | driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently | |
3609 | supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). | |
c8682017 EZ |
3610 | You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable |
3611 | sound support. | |
efeb796b | 3612 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3613 | ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
3614 | ||
3615 | If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are | |
3616 | longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it | |
3617 | is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum | |
3618 | minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: | |
3619 | ||
3620 | - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
3621 | ||
3622 | Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
3623 | fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
3624 | specifies a number of lines. | |
3625 | ||
3626 | Default is 0.25. | |
3627 | ||
3628 | - User option: resize-mini-windows | |
3629 | ||
3630 | How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always | |
3631 | resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows | |
3632 | grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk | |
3633 | again. | |
3634 | ||
3635 | Default is `grow-only'. | |
3636 | ||
3637 | ** LessTif support. | |
3638 | ||
3639 | Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see | |
a04c6760 | 3640 | <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3641 | |
3642 | ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
3643 | ||
3644 | When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
3645 | from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is | |
3646 | non-nil. | |
3647 | ||
8f80abd8 EZ |
3648 | ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported. |
3649 | ||
3650 | When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version | |
3651 | now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a | |
3652 | file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog. | |
3653 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3654 | ** Toolkit scroll bars. |
3655 | ||
3656 | Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for | |
3657 | LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when | |
3658 | configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
3659 | bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
3660 | bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
3661 | Emacs. | |
3662 | ||
3663 | When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
3664 | Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
3665 | Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
3666 | Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
3667 | define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
3668 | `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
3669 | ||
3670 | Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
3671 | a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
3672 | directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
3673 | different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
3674 | system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
3675 | add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
3676 | ||
3677 | The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
3678 | `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
3679 | This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
3593c177 | 3680 | imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3681 | Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. |
3682 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3683 | ** Tool bar support. |
3684 | ||
3685 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
3686 | of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level | |
3687 | changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is | |
3688 | displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved | |
3689 | if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome | |
3690 | icons will be used. | |
3691 | ||
3692 | To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons | |
70fae708 | 3693 | for specific modes (with copyright assignments). |
1e7db2e9 | 3694 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3695 | ** Tooltips. |
3696 | ||
3697 | Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
3698 | mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can | |
3699 | turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
3700 | ||
3701 | Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
3702 | variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
3703 | the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
3704 | tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
3705 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3706 | ** Automatic Hscrolling |
3707 | ||
3708 | Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if | |
3709 | `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
3710 | customized. | |
3711 | ||
3712 | If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or | |
3713 | scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound | |
3714 | for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll | |
3715 | the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more | |
3716 | to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. | |
3717 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3718 | ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor |
3719 | of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is | |
3720 | solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option | |
ab9c49cf | 3721 | `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the |
1e7db2e9 | 3722 | cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if |
2018166d | 3723 | non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3724 | |
3725 | ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
3726 | truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
3727 | foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
3728 | customizing face `fringe'. | |
3729 | ||
3730 | ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. | |
3731 | You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. | |
3732 | In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D | |
3733 | appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line | |
3734 | occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of | |
3735 | the window to be partially obscured.) | |
3736 | ||
3737 | The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older | |
46ff99c0 MB |
3738 | versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated. |
3739 | However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be | |
3740 | ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face. | |
1e7db2e9 | 3741 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3742 | ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
3743 | ||
6b9572dc EZ |
3744 | Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all |
3745 | systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a | |
3746 | mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the | |
3747 | mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is | |
3748 | displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you | |
3749 | have enabled one. | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3750 | |
3751 | Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
3752 | ||
3aa2f38a | 3753 | - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer. |
1e7db2e9 | 3754 | |
3aa2f38a | 3755 | - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3756 | |
3757 | - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or | |
3758 | `*') toggles the status. | |
3759 | ||
3760 | - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. | |
3761 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3762 | ** Hourglass pointer |
3763 | ||
3764 | Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can | |
3765 | turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
3766 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3767 | ** Blinking cursor |
3768 | ||
3769 | M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
3770 | terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
3771 | and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
3772 | the group `cursor'. | |
3773 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3774 | ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. |
3775 | ||
3776 | This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
3777 | generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
3778 | See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
3779 | details. | |
3780 | ||
3781 | Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
3782 | have to do anything to activate it. | |
3783 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3784 | ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed. |
3785 | ||
3786 | The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to | |
3787 | determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys. | |
3788 | ||
3789 | On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen | |
3790 | according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace | |
3791 | key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the | |
3792 | option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to | |
3793 | delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On | |
3794 | keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two | |
3795 | keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is | |
3796 | set to nil, and these keys delete backward. | |
3797 | ||
3798 | If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes | |
3799 | a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the | |
3800 | Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via | |
3801 | `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on | |
3802 | the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only | |
3803 | terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. | |
3804 | ||
3805 | Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode | |
3806 | to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys. | |
3807 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3808 | ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been |
3809 | changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a | |
3810 | buffer by default. | |
3811 | ||
3812 | ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the | |
3813 | current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the | |
3814 | beginning and end of the buffer. | |
3815 | ||
3816 | ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the | |
3817 | recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is | |
3818 | signaled. | |
3819 | ||
3820 | ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init | |
3821 | file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. | |
3822 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3823 | ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
3824 | compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
3825 | this behavior. | |
3826 | ||
efeb796b | 3827 | The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3828 | compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let |
3829 | Emacs dump core. | |
3830 | ||
3831 | ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
3832 | ||
3833 | When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
3834 | widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
3835 | Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
3836 | ||
3837 | ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is | |
3838 | more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is | |
3839 | now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. | |
3840 | ||
3841 | ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set | |
3842 | using that menu. | |
3843 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3844 | ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. |
3845 | ||
3846 | When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
3847 | whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
3848 | defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
3849 | highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
3850 | displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
3851 | whitespace. | |
3852 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3853 | ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
3854 | all frames except the selected one. | |
3855 | ||
3856 | ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to | |
3857 | let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. | |
3858 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3859 | ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs |
3860 | header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), | |
3861 | so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. | |
3862 | This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option | |
3863 | `Info-use-header-line'. | |
3864 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3865 | ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card |
3866 | have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', | |
3867 | `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. | |
3868 | ||
3869 | ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. | |
3870 | ||
3871 | ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is | |
3872 | `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in | |
3873 | `fr-drdref.tex'. | |
3874 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3875 | ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not |
3876 | displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the | |
3877 | menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode | |
3878 | menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. | |
3879 | ||
efeb796b | 3880 | ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize. |
17851d9d | 3881 | |
a19e85cc | 3882 | You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path' |
17851d9d EZ |
3883 | because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still |
3884 | use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your | |
3885 | `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general. | |
1e7db2e9 | 3886 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3887 | ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at |
3888 | point in a pop-up window. | |
3889 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3890 | ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
3891 | under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or | |
3892 | customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. | |
3893 | ||
3894 | The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' | |
3895 | determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. | |
3896 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
3897 | ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
3898 | sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
3899 | (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) | |
aa082854 | 3900 | You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location. |
1e7db2e9 | 3901 | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
3902 | ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
3903 | ||
eb1b0c74 GM |
3904 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
3905 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
3906 | ||
c607d53d | 3907 | ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
346598f1 | 3908 | trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
c607d53d SS |
3909 | this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
3910 | ||
4104194e | 3911 | ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
1e36ff68 DL |
3912 | be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
3913 | non-nil. | |
4104194e | 3914 | |
ba9eeda1 GM |
3915 | ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
3916 | set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a | |
3917 | file that is already visited under a different name. | |
3918 | ||
42ac0ae5 GM |
3919 | ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
3920 | nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. | |
3921 | ||
ba9eeda1 | 3922 | ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
eb27839a | 3923 | and displays information about that. |
b941a14b | 3924 | |
25ad1371 GM |
3925 | ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
3926 | expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. | |
3927 | ||
3928 | This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to | |
3929 | determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a | |
3930 | mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be | |
3931 | interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the | |
3932 | regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode | |
3933 | associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. | |
3934 | ||
40e857ea | 3935 | ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
424d8b44 | 3936 | suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
40e857ea | 3937 | |
c08398de DL |
3938 | ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
3939 | buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer | |
3940 | contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or | |
3941 | by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and | |
3942 | insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, | |
3943 | the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. | |
3944 | Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. | |
3945 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3946 | ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
3947 | been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
3948 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3949 | ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding |
3950 | system for keyboard input. | |
3951 | ||
3d6cd763 GM |
3952 | ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
3953 | coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's | |
3954 | escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores | |
3955 | such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is | |
3956 | recommended not to change it except for the special case that you | |
07b14857 | 3957 | always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
3d6cd763 | 3958 | read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
07b14857 KH |
3959 | (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
3960 | RET C-x C-f filename RET. | |
26ae8525 | 3961 | |
0b8a3a6d DL |
3962 | ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
3963 | environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. | |
3964 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
3965 | ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
3966 | displays all characters in that character set. | |
3967 | ||
3968 | ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based | |
3969 | coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. | |
3970 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3971 | ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
3972 | and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the | |
3973 | LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. | |
3974 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3975 | ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
3976 | Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets | |
3977 | 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). | |
3978 | GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have | |
3979 | 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. | |
3980 | There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) | |
3981 | and Polish `slash'. | |
3982 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
3983 | ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. |
3984 | These new environments mainly select appropriate translations | |
3985 | of the tutorial. | |
3986 | ||
3987 | ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for | |
3988 | function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs | |
3989 | Lisp Coding Convention". | |
3990 | ||
3991 | new command old-binding | |
3992 | --- ------- ----------- | |
3993 | f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 | |
3994 | S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 | |
3995 | C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 | |
3996 | ||
3997 | f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged | |
3998 | S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged | |
3999 | C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged | |
4000 | ||
4001 | S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 | |
4002 | S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 | |
4003 | S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 | |
4004 | S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 | |
4005 | S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged | |
4006 | C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 | |
4007 | ||
bd161121 EZ |
4008 | ** There are new Leim input methods. |
4009 | New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix", | |
4010 | "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim | |
4011 | package. | |
4012 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
4013 | ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the |
4014 | rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus | |
4015 | typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating | |
4016 | "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input | |
4017 | "`", you must type "=q". | |
4018 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
4019 | ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
4020 | 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display | |
4021 | more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of | |
4022 | empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a | |
4023 | window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this | |
4024 | on. | |
4025 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
4026 | ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
4027 | on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, | |
4028 | defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region | |
4029 | commenting with the variable `comment-style'. | |
5cb6a58e | 4030 | |
5898e075 DL |
4031 | ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
4032 | `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
4033 | indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
4034 | indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
4035 | ||
cc181e95 GM |
4036 | ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
4037 | on the display using several methods | |
4038 | ||
4039 | - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be | |
4040 | a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
4041 | be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
4042 | ||
4043 | - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is | |
5820dead | 4044 | equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
cc181e95 | 4045 | |
da4496b6 | 4046 | - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
cc181e95 GM |
4047 | |
4048 | - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
4049 | the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
4050 | ||
3b4fa1b2 | 4051 | ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
1c459486 | 4052 | an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
3b4fa1b2 | 4053 | command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
1c459486 | 4054 | does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
0daee095 | 4055 | |
176256a1 | 4056 | ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
3bbc50af DL |
4057 | `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
4058 | typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
176256a1 | 4059 | |
dd0add8e DL |
4060 | ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
4061 | characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
4062 | ||
699238d9 | 4063 | ** New X resources recognized |
100b3cbb | 4064 | |
7233c5bd GM |
4065 | *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
4066 | whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
4067 | is useful for debugging X problems. | |
4068 | ||
4069 | Example: | |
4070 | ||
699238d9 | 4071 | emacs.synchronous: true |
7233c5bd | 4072 | |
100b3cbb GM |
4073 | *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
4074 | visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
4075 | the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, | |
4076 | and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
4077 | visual class names are | |
4078 | ||
4079 | TrueColor | |
4080 | PseudoColor | |
4081 | DirectColor | |
4082 | StaticColor | |
4083 | GrayScale | |
4084 | StaticGray | |
4085 | ||
4086 | Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
4087 | `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
4088 | meaning. | |
4089 | ||
4090 | The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes | |
4091 | supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
4092 | `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
4093 | visual. | |
4094 | ||
4095 | Example: | |
4096 | ||
699238d9 | 4097 | emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
100b3cbb GM |
4098 | |
4099 | *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
4100 | specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
4101 | default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
4102 | resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
4103 | ||
4104 | Example: | |
4105 | ||
699238d9 | 4106 | emacs.privateColormap: true |
100b3cbb | 4107 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4108 | ** Faces and frame parameters. |
4109 | ||
4110 | There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
4111 | Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
4112 | `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
4113 | `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
4114 | sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
4115 | for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
4116 | parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
4117 | ||
4118 | Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
4119 | `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
79214ddf | 4120 | `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
a933dad1 DL |
4121 | `default' face and vice versa. |
4122 | ||
f77a4a8a GM |
4123 | ** New face `menu'. |
4124 | ||
4125 | The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
f77a4a8a | 4126 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4127 | ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
4128 | ||
4129 | The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
4130 | colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
4131 | correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
4132 | the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
4133 | ||
4134 | PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
4135 | in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
4136 | color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
4137 | ||
4138 | The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
4139 | `ScreenGamma'. | |
4140 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4141 | ** Tabs and variable-width text. |
4142 | ||
4143 | Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
4144 | defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
4145 | independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
4146 | Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
4147 | ||
4148 | ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
4149 | ||
4150 | *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
4151 | ||
4152 | emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
4153 | ||
79dd1637 RS |
4154 | The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
4155 | LessTif/Motif one. | |
a933dad1 | 4156 | |
79dd1637 RS |
4157 | *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
4158 | LessTif and Motif. | |
a933dad1 | 4159 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4160 | ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
4161 | ||
4162 | As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
4163 | drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
4164 | `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
4165 | ||
4166 | ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
efeb796b | 4167 | bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less). |
a933dad1 DL |
4168 | |
4169 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
4170 | `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
4171 | variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
4172 | ||
4173 | ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
4174 | ||
4175 | When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
d9e66103 | 4176 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
a933dad1 | 4177 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
d5951185 | 4178 | fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
a933dad1 DL |
4179 | |
4180 | When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
8a33023e | 4181 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
a933dad1 | 4182 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
d5951185 | 4183 | fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
a933dad1 | 4184 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4185 | ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either |
4186 | M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. | |
4187 | M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special | |
4188 | buffers. | |
4189 | ||
4190 | ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. | |
4191 | ||
4192 | ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows | |
4193 | abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
4194 | `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
4195 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
4196 | ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
4197 | the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
4198 | forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
4199 | value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
4200 | users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
4201 | even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
4202 | ||
4203 | The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
4204 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4205 | ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, |
4206 | notably at the end of lines. | |
4207 | ||
4208 | All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
4209 | spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
4210 | ||
8748ecc0 | 4211 | ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'. |
eee54b0e | 4212 | |
8748ecc0 GM |
4213 | ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle', |
4214 | but inserts text instead of replacing it. | |
2ce72bfa | 4215 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4216 | ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
4217 | query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
4218 | after each match to get the replacement text. | |
4219 | ||
d5483ab1 GM |
4220 | ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
4221 | you edit the replacement string. | |
4ff40dd0 | 4222 | |
75823f67 EZ |
4223 | ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB' |
4224 | (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases | |
4225 | in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol. | |
4ff40dd0 | 4226 | |
efeb796b | 4227 | ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
889be0a1 | 4228 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4229 | ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
4230 | to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
327652be | 4231 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4232 | ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
4233 | the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and | |
4234 | MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus | |
4235 | displayed by Emacs now have help strings. | |
a32da22c | 4236 | |
75823f67 | 4237 | -- |
efeb796b EZ |
4238 | ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
4239 | read mail from the menu etc. | |
559cee90 | 4240 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4241 | ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. |
4242 | This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on | |
4243 | MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made | |
4244 | before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. | |
559cee90 | 4245 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4246 | ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the |
4247 | MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
424d8b44 | 4248 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4249 | ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version |
4250 | of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. | |
4251 | This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons | |
4252 | correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, | |
4253 | but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version | |
4254 | of Emacs. | |
eb2aac9d | 4255 | |
efeb796b | 4256 | ** Customize changes |
eb2aac9d | 4257 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4258 | *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the |
4259 | `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to | |
4260 | M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that | |
4261 | customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in | |
4262 | earlier versions of Emacs. | |
1b24b888 | 4263 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4264 | *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill |
4265 | Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
4266 | default). | |
79c78e77 | 4267 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4268 | *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
4269 | does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init | |
4270 | file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would | |
4271 | wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init | |
4272 | file. | |
79c78e77 | 4273 | |
7e97c157 EZ |
4274 | ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
4275 | does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to | |
4276 | avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are | |
4277 | already in your init file. | |
4278 | ||
efeb796b | 4279 | ** New features in evaluation commands |
3476b54a | 4280 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4281 | *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
4282 | modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
4283 | print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new | |
4284 | customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
4285 | eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
a933dad1 | 4286 | |
f37e8c77 EZ |
4287 | The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4 |
4288 | respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most | |
4289 | the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if | |
4290 | the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is | |
4291 | printed). | |
4292 | ||
75c5350a GM |
4293 | <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated |
4294 | printed representation and an unabbreviated one. | |
f6e6cdf2 | 4295 | |
f37e8c77 EZ |
4296 | The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error |
4297 | during evaluation produces a backtrace. | |
4298 | ||
3a426197 | 4299 | *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
5e03eb84 GM |
4300 | code when called with a prefix argument. |
4301 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
4302 | ** CC mode changes. |
4303 | ||
4304 | Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
4305 | current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
4306 | incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
4307 | However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
4308 | back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
4309 | compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
4310 | release. | |
4311 | ||
e120bebf GM |
4312 | *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. |
4313 | CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode | |
4314 | is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much | |
4315 | confusion. | |
4316 | ||
4317 | However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the | |
4318 | default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for | |
4319 | java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't | |
4320 | notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. | |
4321 | ||
4322 | *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. | |
4323 | Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: | |
4324 | ||
4325 | space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening | |
4326 | parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". | |
4327 | ||
4328 | compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening | |
4329 | parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. | |
4330 | It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the | |
4331 | style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". | |
4332 | ||
4333 | *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. | |
4334 | Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made | |
4335 | "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an | |
4336 | earlier statement. An example: | |
4337 | ||
4338 | for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) | |
4339 | if (a[i]) | |
4340 | res += a[i]->offset; | |
4341 | else | |
4342 | ||
4343 | Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it | |
4344 | continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after | |
4345 | the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's | |
4346 | possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of | |
4347 | the preceding "if". | |
4348 | ||
4349 | CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on | |
4350 | by default. | |
4351 | ||
4352 | *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. | |
4353 | Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which | |
4354 | meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing | |
4355 | documentation or other natural language text. | |
4356 | ||
4357 | The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that | |
4358 | contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in | |
4359 | the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline | |
4360 | strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed | |
4361 | to other strings that typically contain format specifications, | |
4362 | commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses | |
4363 | sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. | |
4364 | ||
4365 | *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. | |
4366 | Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the | |
4367 | source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in | |
4368 | comment prefixes and paragraph starts. | |
4369 | ||
4370 | *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. | |
4371 | When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment | |
4372 | line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This | |
4373 | change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in | |
4374 | Pike mode only. | |
4375 | ||
4376 | *** Better handling of syntactic errors. | |
4377 | The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been | |
4378 | improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message | |
4379 | stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the | |
4380 | following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no | |
4381 | matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while | |
4382 | indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error | |
4383 | is reported afterwards. | |
4384 | ||
4385 | *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. | |
4386 | A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by | |
4387 | returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. | |
4388 | ||
4389 | *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. | |
4390 | Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending | |
4391 | on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now | |
4392 | can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some | |
4393 | code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the | |
4394 | modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the | |
4395 | groundwork. | |
4396 | ||
7972fcfc GM |
4397 | *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
4398 | This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior | |
4399 | of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for | |
4400 | non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might | |
4401 | want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't | |
4402 | have to bother. | |
4403 | ||
4404 | Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing | |
4405 | situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally | |
487522fe | 4406 | and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
7972fcfc GM |
4407 | If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
4408 | the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" | |
4409 | by default) to override the global settings made by the user. | |
4410 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
4411 | *** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
4412 | When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
4413 | variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
4414 | take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
4415 | is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
4416 | settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
4417 | possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
4418 | Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
4419 | ||
4420 | By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
4421 | special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
4422 | the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
4423 | of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
4424 | above. | |
4425 | ||
4426 | Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
4427 | when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
4428 | function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
4429 | call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
4430 | then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
4431 | values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
4432 | only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
4433 | function documentation for more info. | |
4434 | ||
4435 | The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
4436 | especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
4437 | with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
4438 | intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
4439 | such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
4440 | is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
4441 | configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
4442 | global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
4443 | ||
4444 | (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
4445 | ||
4446 | **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
4447 | This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
4448 | ||
4449 | This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
4450 | variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
4451 | completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
4452 | the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
4453 | empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
4454 | style system. | |
4455 | ||
4456 | **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
4457 | In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
4458 | c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
4459 | as far as possible. | |
4460 | ||
4461 | *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
4462 | CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
4463 | surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
4464 | chapter about this in the manual. | |
4465 | ||
4466 | **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
4467 | The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
4468 | recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
4469 | primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
4470 | adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
4471 | ||
4472 | **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
4473 | This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
4474 | c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
4475 | ||
4476 | **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
4477 | This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
4478 | ||
4479 | It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
4480 | Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
4481 | A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
4482 | inside CC Mode. | |
4483 | ||
4484 | Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
4485 | causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
4486 | the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
4487 | available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
4488 | cc-mode/). | |
4489 | ||
9ed462b7 EZ |
4490 | **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and |
4491 | `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and | |
4492 | enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the | |
4493 | function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as | |
4494 | they were before the filling. | |
4495 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
4496 | **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. |
4497 | The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
4498 | specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
4499 | literals. | |
4500 | ||
4501 | **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
4502 | It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
4503 | prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
4504 | you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
4505 | this function. | |
4506 | ||
4507 | *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
4508 | It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
4509 | to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
4510 | struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
4511 | Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
4512 | ||
4513 | *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
4514 | It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
4515 | opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
4516 | ||
4517 | **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
4518 | ||
4519 | *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
4520 | See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
4521 | better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
4522 | and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
4523 | ||
4524 | *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
4525 | previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
4526 | the column specified by comment-column. | |
4527 | ||
4528 | *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
4529 | In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
4530 | is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
4531 | prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
4532 | contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
4533 | don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
4534 | ||
4535 | *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
4536 | instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
4537 | arguments. | |
4538 | ||
4539 | *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
4540 | ||
4541 | *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
4542 | c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
4543 | c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
4544 | variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
4545 | Provan). | |
4546 | ||
4547 | *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
4548 | ||
efeb796b | 4549 | ** Dired changes |
c407c570 | 4550 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4551 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete |
4552 | command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
4553 | is, delete only empty directories. | |
c407c570 | 4554 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4555 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy |
4556 | command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
4557 | copy directories recursively. | |
87be76f6 | 4558 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4559 | *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
4560 | in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with | |
4561 | the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. | |
3353ef5a | 4562 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4563 | *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
4564 | replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or | |
4565 | directory. | |
c407c570 | 4566 | |
a320a8e7 | 4567 | *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows |
efeb796b EZ |
4568 | a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
4569 | This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so | |
4570 | will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as | |
4571 | accurate or inaccurate as it is. | |
4572 | ||
4573 | *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' | |
4574 | from ls switches. | |
4575 | ||
4576 | *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use | |
4577 | of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, | |
4578 | which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single | |
4579 | source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. | |
a933dad1 | 4580 | |
efeb796b | 4581 | ** Gnus changes. |
87be76f6 | 4582 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4583 | The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in |
4584 | four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, | |
4585 | internationalization and mail-fetching. | |
87be76f6 | 4586 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4587 | *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the |
4588 | many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. | |
87be76f6 | 4589 | |
efeb796b | 4590 | If you used procmail like in |
87be76f6 | 4591 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4592 | (setq nnmail-use-procmail t) |
4593 | (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) | |
4594 | (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") | |
4595 | (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") | |
35384f06 | 4596 | |
efeb796b | 4597 | this now has changed to |
87be76f6 | 4598 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4599 | (setq mail-sources |
4600 | '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" | |
4601 | :suffix ".in"))) | |
d7b511c4 | 4602 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4603 | More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> |
4604 | Getting Mail -> Mail Sources | |
d67f47e4 | 4605 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4606 | *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of |
4607 | Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. | |
4608 | Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no | |
4609 | longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. | |
d7b511c4 | 4610 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4611 | The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
4612 | use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was | |
4613 | installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. | |
9d453139 | 4614 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4615 | *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
4616 | parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There | |
4617 | are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is | |
4618 | now just a compatibility layer. | |
4b9347b3 | 4619 | |
75823f67 EZ |
4620 | *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
4621 | Gnus facilities. | |
4622 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
4623 | *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be |
4624 | called to position point. | |
4b9347b3 | 4625 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4626 | *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in |
4627 | summary buffers and NOV files. | |
79214ddf | 4628 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4629 | *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number |
4630 | of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. | |
79214ddf | 4631 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4632 | *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a |
4633 | subtly different manner. | |
aca0be23 | 4634 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4635 | *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive |
4636 | and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with | |
4637 | ever-changing layouts. | |
79214ddf | 4638 | |
efeb796b | 4639 | *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. |
79214ddf | 4640 | |
efeb796b | 4641 | *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
8c463abe | 4642 | |
efeb796b | 4643 | ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
8c463abe | 4644 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4645 | *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
4646 | macros | |
79214ddf | 4647 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4648 | Key binding Macro |
4649 | ------------------------- | |
4650 | C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
4651 | C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
4652 | C-c C-c u @uref | |
4653 | C-c C-c q @quotation | |
4654 | C-c C-c m @email | |
4655 | C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> | |
4656 | M-RET @item | |
79214ddf | 4657 | |
efeb796b | 4658 | *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. |
79214ddf | 4659 | |
efeb796b | 4660 | ** Changes in Outline mode. |
79214ddf | 4661 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4662 | There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
4663 | `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to | |
4664 | the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. | |
89d57763 | 4665 | |
efeb796b | 4666 | ** Changes to Emacs Server |
79214ddf | 4667 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4668 | *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do |
4669 | with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers | |
4670 | are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with | |
4671 | Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which | |
4672 | buffers to kill, as before. | |
79214ddf | 4673 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4674 | Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, |
4675 | i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in | |
4676 | this way. | |
4677 | ||
4678 | ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options | |
4679 | of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE. | |
4680 | ||
4681 | ** Changes to Show Paren mode. | |
4682 | ||
4683 | *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. | |
4684 | The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to | |
4685 | use. Default is 1000. | |
79214ddf | 4686 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4687 | ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
4688 | groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
f6737cde | 4689 | |
efeb796b | 4690 | ** Changes to hideshow.el |
3f6e4b8b | 4691 | |
efeb796b | 4692 | *** Generalized block selection and traversal |
f6737cde | 4693 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4694 | A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
4695 | and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp | |
4696 | serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. | |
4697 | See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. | |
f6737cde | 4698 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4699 | *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, |
4700 | hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can | |
4701 | be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of | |
4702 | the open block. | |
f6737cde | 4703 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4704 | *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a |
4705 | function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of | |
4706 | the normal block-hiding function. | |
f6737cde | 4707 | |
efeb796b | 4708 | *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. |
f6737cde | 4709 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4710 | *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, |
4711 | roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix | |
4712 | for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation | |
4713 | for `hs-minor-mode'. | |
f6737cde | 4714 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4715 | *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and |
4716 | hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t. | |
f6737cde | 4717 | |
efeb796b | 4718 | ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
f6737cde | 4719 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4720 | *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
4721 | an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making | |
4722 | log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. | |
0c68ce6f | 4723 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4724 | **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
4725 | current buffer. | |
d521e087 | 4726 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4727 | *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries |
4728 | in a log file. | |
1e7db2e9 | 4729 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4730 | *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log |
4731 | entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. | |
4732 | Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's | |
4733 | version number is performed based on regular expressions from | |
4734 | `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. | |
4735 | Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. | |
4736 | ||
4737 | *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. | |
4738 | ||
4739 | ** Changes to cmuscheme | |
4740 | ||
4741 | *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed | |
4742 | `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. | |
4743 | ||
4744 | ** Changes in Font Lock | |
4745 | ||
4746 | *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove | |
4747 | font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. | |
4748 | ||
4749 | *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should | |
4750 | set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. | |
4751 | ||
4752 | *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose | |
4753 | the face used for each string/comment. | |
4754 | ||
4755 | *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. | |
4756 | Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". | |
4757 | ||
4758 | ** Changes to Shell mode | |
4759 | ||
4760 | *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer | |
4761 | to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a | |
4762 | non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a | |
4763 | prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name). | |
4764 | ||
4765 | ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
4766 | ||
4767 | These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which | |
4768 | include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. | |
4769 | ||
4770 | *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters. | |
4771 | Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and | |
4772 | BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the | |
4773 | beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character, | |
4774 | respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to | |
4775 | the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default. | |
4776 | ||
4777 | *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' | |
4778 | to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which | |
4779 | parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the | |
4780 | user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use | |
4781 | this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, | |
4782 | respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this | |
4783 | feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option | |
4784 | `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. | |
4785 | ||
4786 | *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
4787 | and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
4788 | ||
4789 | *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
4790 | buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
4791 | buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
4792 | ||
4793 | The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
4794 | M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
4795 | the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
4796 | ||
4797 | *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, | |
4798 | and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, | |
4799 | see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. | |
4800 | ||
4801 | *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') | |
4802 | saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix | |
4803 | argument, it appends to the file. | |
4804 | ||
4805 | *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' | |
4806 | (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for | |
4807 | compatibility. | |
4808 | ||
4809 | *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input | |
4810 | ring (history). | |
4811 | ||
4812 | *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for | |
4813 | identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp | |
4814 | strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". | |
4815 | ||
4816 | ** Changes to Rmail mode | |
4817 | ||
4818 | *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be | |
4819 | set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when | |
4820 | receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the | |
4821 | recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
4822 | `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
4823 | as correspondent. | |
4824 | ||
4825 | Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
4826 | mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
4827 | regexp matching your mail addresses. | |
4828 | ||
4829 | *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how | |
4830 | to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
4831 | Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
4832 | with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
4833 | for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
4834 | ||
4835 | *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, | |
4836 | like `j'. | |
4837 | ||
4838 | *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that | |
4839 | specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a | |
4840 | digest message. | |
4841 | ||
4842 | *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies | |
4843 | in which folder to put messages automatically. | |
4844 | ||
4845 | *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message | |
4846 | with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly | |
4847 | due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. | |
4848 | ||
4849 | ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify | |
4850 | an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address. | |
4851 | ||
75823f67 EZ |
4852 | ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
4853 | use the -f option when sending mail. | |
4854 | ||
f68113db EZ |
4855 | ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the |
4856 | current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in | |
4857 | the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'. | |
4858 | This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded | |
4859 | by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be | |
4860 | displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file. | |
4861 | ||
4862 | If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system | |
4863 | other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable | |
4864 | `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system. | |
4865 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
4866 | ** Changes to TeX mode |
4867 | ||
4868 | *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
4869 | `latex-mode'. | |
4870 | ||
4871 | *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. | |
4872 | ||
4873 | *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. | |
4874 | ||
4875 | *** Added support for outline-minor-mode. | |
4876 | ||
4877 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
4878 | ||
4879 | *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
4880 | created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
4881 | Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
4882 | macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
4883 | sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
4884 | can be edited from that buffer. | |
4885 | ||
4886 | *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
4887 | items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
4888 | `A' to use all marked entries). | |
4889 | ||
4890 | *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
4891 | memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
4892 | ||
4893 | *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
4894 | in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
4895 | to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
4896 | been cited. | |
4897 | ||
4898 | ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. | |
4899 | The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading | |
4900 | semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' | |
4901 | in column 1 are always made leaves. | |
4902 | ||
4903 | ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) | |
4904 | has the following new features: | |
4905 | ||
4906 | *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
4907 | may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
4908 | to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
4909 | time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
4910 | ||
4911 | *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
4912 | feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
4913 | file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
4914 | compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
4915 | pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
4916 | defaults to 1. | |
4917 | ||
4918 | ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in | |
4919 | file names. | |
4920 | ||
4921 | ** Ispell changes | |
fbc164de | 4922 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4923 | *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
4924 | transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it | |
4925 | spell-checks the current buffer. | |
59c1bf85 | 4926 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4927 | *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
4928 | added. | |
732b9cdd | 4929 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4930 | *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling |
4931 | correction is made and re-checked. | |
b8b2ea31 | 4932 | |
4cdf4bde | 4933 | *** Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definitions have been added. |
b8b2ea31 | 4934 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4935 | *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some |
4936 | cases. | |
b8b2ea31 | 4937 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4938 | *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict |
4939 | on syntax errors. | |
4940 | ||
4941 | *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the | |
4942 | end of the buffer. | |
4943 | ||
4944 | *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
4945 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
4946 | ** Makefile mode changes |
4947 | ||
4948 | *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
b8b2ea31 | 4949 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4950 | *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
4951 | Fontlock mode is active. | |
1e406be0 | 4952 | |
efeb796b | 4953 | ** Isearch changes |
e33b0397 | 4954 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4955 | *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
4956 | so that searches can be resumed. | |
e33b0397 | 4957 | |
3a426197 | 4958 | *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, |
efeb796b EZ |
4959 | respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
4960 | that started the search. | |
4961 | ||
4962 | *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | |
4963 | selection into the search string rather than giving an error. | |
6f8ea2ae | 4964 | |
efeb796b | 4965 | *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
c0510d27 | 4966 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4967 | Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
4968 | `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current | |
4969 | search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
4970 | before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
4971 | highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
4972 | `secondary-selection'. | |
5d94f558 | 4973 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4974 | The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor |
4975 | will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
4976 | Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
4977 | using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
4978 | usual snappy response. | |
dc28878c | 4979 | |
efeb796b EZ |
4980 | If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for |
4981 | matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
4982 | set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
4983 | isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
95931eb1 | 4984 | |
54baed30 GM |
4985 | ** VC Changes |
4986 | ||
4987 | VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it | |
4988 | easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp | |
4989 | Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism | |
4990 | to enable and disable support for particular version systems has | |
4991 | changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable | |
60a441a5 | 4992 | `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
54baed30 GM |
4993 | version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
4994 | each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the | |
4995 | file is registered in that backend. | |
4996 | ||
4997 | When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed | |
4998 | backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the | |
4999 | directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for | |
5000 | master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then | |
5001 | the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. | |
5002 | As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. | |
5003 | ||
5004 | The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC | |
5005 | still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for | |
5006 | RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables | |
5007 | vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS | |
5008 | where it doesn't make sense.) | |
5009 | ||
5010 | The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also | |
5011 | obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude | |
5012 | `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. | |
5013 | ||
5014 | *** General Changes | |
5015 | ||
5016 | The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding | |
5017 | checks are always done now. | |
5018 | ||
327652be | 5019 | VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
54baed30 GM |
5020 | operations. |
5021 | ||
c286608e SM |
5022 | `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
5023 | `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. | |
5024 | `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. | |
5025 | ||
22933be8 AS |
5026 | The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
5027 | first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the | |
5028 | current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into | |
5029 | the working file (``merge news''). | |
5030 | ||
5031 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r | |
5032 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work | |
5033 | downwards. | |
5034 | ||
5035 | *** Multiple Backends | |
5036 | ||
5037 | VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is | |
5038 | useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS | |
5039 | repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally | |
5040 | commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your | |
5041 | local RCS archives. | |
5042 | ||
5043 | To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) | |
5044 | should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' | |
5045 | backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of | |
5046 | `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) | |
5047 | ||
60a441a5 AS |
5048 | You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
5049 | C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as | |
5050 | a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend | |
5051 | if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the | |
5052 | current revision number from the more remote backend. | |
22933be8 AS |
5053 | |
5054 | If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to | |
5055 | another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change | |
5056 | any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to | |
5057 | pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. | |
5058 | ||
5059 | After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your | |
5060 | changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the | |
5061 | local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry | |
5062 | buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. | |
5063 | ||
54baed30 GM |
5064 | *** Changes for CVS |
5065 | ||
5066 | There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the | |
5067 | default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in | |
5068 | remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined | |
5069 | by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a | |
5070 | regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts | |
5071 | that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC | |
5072 | queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. | |
5073 | ||
22933be8 AS |
5074 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
5075 | repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and | |
5076 | revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without | |
5077 | any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version | |
5078 | backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version | |
5079 | number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ | |
5080 | (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter | |
5081 | of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, | |
5082 | the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted | |
105602b1 EZ |
5083 | automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
5084 | since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file | |
5085 | name.) | |
22933be8 | 5086 | |
54baed30 GM |
5087 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
5088 | repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. | |
5089 | If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to | |
22933be8 | 5090 | commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
54baed30 GM |
5091 | current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
5092 | entire directory tree. | |
5093 | ||
5094 | The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call | |
5095 | "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option | |
5096 | is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are | |
5097 | "watched" by other developers.) | |
5098 | ||
22933be8 AS |
5099 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
5100 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give | |
60a441a5 | 5101 | an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
22933be8 AS |
5102 | starting at the given directory. |
5103 | ||
54baed30 GM |
5104 | *** Lisp Changes in VC |
5105 | ||
5106 | VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now | |
5107 | add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a | |
5108 | library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and | |
5109 | then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for | |
60a441a5 AS |
5110 | a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
5111 | provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top | |
54baed30 | 5112 | of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
60a441a5 AS |
5113 | you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
5114 | `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. | |
54baed30 | 5115 | |
c4ed232b | 5116 | ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
732b9cdd GM |
5117 | SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
5118 | terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. | |
5119 | See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. | |
5120 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5121 | ** New modes and packages |
5122 | ||
79b9f6e0 MB |
5123 | *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
5124 | automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when | |
5125 | the default is not applicable. | |
5126 | ||
b95b34e5 GM |
5127 | *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
5128 | rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The | |
5129 | shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. | |
5130 | ||
5131 | Features are: | |
5132 | ||
5133 | - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is | |
5134 | drawn, like this: | \ / | |
c607d53d | 5135 | --+-- X |
b95b34e5 GM |
5136 | | / \ |
5137 | ||
5138 | - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the | |
5139 | result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If | |
5140 | your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a | |
5141 | pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will | |
5142 | then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line | |
5143 | you are drawing. | |
5144 | ||
5145 | - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) | |
5146 | poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. | |
5147 | ||
5148 | - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by | |
5149 | flood-filling. | |
5150 | ||
5151 | - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular | |
5152 | regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be | |
5153 | turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in | |
5154 | artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. | |
c607d53d | 5155 | |
b95b34e5 GM |
5156 | - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
5157 | also do without the mouse. | |
5158 | ||
5159 | - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to | |
5160 | reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares | |
5161 | and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your | |
5162 | ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, | |
5163 | the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. | |
5164 | ||
5165 | - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: | |
5166 | ||
5167 | lines straight-lines | |
5168 | rectangles squares | |
5169 | poly-lines straight poly-lines | |
5170 | ellipses circles | |
5171 | text (see-thru) text (overwrite) | |
5172 | spray-can setting size for spraying | |
5173 | vaporize line vaporize lines | |
5174 | erase characters erase rectangles | |
5175 | ||
5176 | Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or | |
5177 | diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in | |
5178 | the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while | |
5179 | drawing. | |
5180 | ||
5181 | It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines | |
5182 | (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are | |
5183 | straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired | |
5184 | by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. | |
5185 | ||
5186 | - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this | |
5187 | can be turned off). | |
5188 | ||
4473cdd9 JW |
5189 | *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell |
5190 | implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. | |
5191 | It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp | |
5192 | functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports | |
5193 | history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It | |
5194 | will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of | |
5195 | the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been | |
5196 | rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, | |
5197 | all within the scope of your Emacs process. | |
5198 | ||
90cbf47e GM |
5199 | *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
5200 | intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the | |
5201 | typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working | |
5202 | on certain projects. | |
5203 | ||
baf7eee4 GM |
5204 | *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
5205 | of interactively entered regexps. For example, | |
abb2db1c | 5206 | |
d96d6bb0 | 5207 | M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET |
abb2db1c GM |
5208 | |
5209 | will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background | |
5210 | face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are | |
5211 | typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. | |
5212 | Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of | |
5213 | appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the | |
5214 | current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the | |
baf7eee4 GM |
5215 | corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
5216 | to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. | |
abb2db1c | 5217 | |
d96d6bb0 | 5218 | *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
abb2db1c GM |
5219 | Emacs is idle. |
5220 | ||
b4c3513f EZ |
5221 | *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text |
5222 | fragments in accordance with the current major mode. | |
5223 | ||
31fc5d15 GM |
5224 | *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
5225 | parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. | |
5226 | ||
5cb6a58e SM |
5227 | *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
5228 | package which allows different styles of comment-region and should | |
5229 | be more robust while offering the same functionality. | |
601e0081 SM |
5230 | `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
5231 | comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. | |
5cb6a58e | 5232 | |
578979ee GM |
5233 | *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
5234 | facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
5235 | separate Texinfo file. | |
5236 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
5237 | *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or |
5238 | by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) | |
5239 | provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with | |
5240 | `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to | |
8a33023e | 5241 | enter check-in log messages. |
dc1178bf | 5242 | |
6abca616 EZ |
5243 | *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
5244 | without invoking external programs. | |
5245 | ||
5246 | The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
5247 | and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
5248 | `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
5249 | is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
490f2e7b | 5250 | Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
6abca616 EZ |
5251 | |
5252 | The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
5253 | page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
5254 | ||
5e5dff44 GM |
5255 | *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
5256 | authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
5257 | ||
5258 | The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
5259 | the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
5260 | the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
5261 | Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
5262 | even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
5263 | single step. | |
5264 | ||
5265 | On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
5266 | matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
5267 | probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
5268 | contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
5269 | ||
f7136ee8 GM |
5270 | *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
5271 | unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
5272 | actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
5273 | ||
bbd9b566 GM |
5274 | *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
5275 | PostScript. | |
5276 | ||
5277 | Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
5278 | ||
5279 | The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
5280 | ||
5281 | ; comment (until end of line) | |
5282 | A non-terminal | |
5283 | "C" terminal | |
5284 | ?C? special | |
5285 | $A default non-terminal | |
5286 | $"C" default terminal | |
5287 | $?C? default special | |
5288 | A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
5289 | C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
5290 | C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
5291 | A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
5292 | n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
5293 | (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
5294 | [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
5295 | C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
5296 | {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
5297 | {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
5298 | {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
5299 | C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
5300 | {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
5301 | {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
5302 | {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
5303 | ||
5304 | Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
5305 | ||
99453a38 GM |
5306 | *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
5307 | align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
5308 | determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
5309 | example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
5310 | equal signs of assignments. | |
5311 | ||
559cee90 DL |
5312 | *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
5313 | paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. | |
5314 | ||
6448a6b3 GM |
5315 | *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
5316 | list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
2018166d | 5317 | buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. |
6448a6b3 | 5318 | |
6344985d GM |
5319 | *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
5320 | ||
249652b1 GM |
5321 | *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
5322 | replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
5323 | is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
5324 | and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
5325 | not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
5326 | which answers different needs. | |
5327 | ||
3476b54a GM |
5328 | *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
5329 | suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside | |
5330 | expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of | |
5331 | course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with | |
5332 | reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode | |
5333 | to be enabled. | |
5334 | ||
8964fec7 SM |
5335 | *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
5336 | containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. | |
5337 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5338 | *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
5339 | ||
16837afc GM |
5340 | *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the |
5341 | current line in the current buffer. It also provides | |
dfd67a62 | 5342 | `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers. |
a933dad1 DL |
5343 | |
5344 | *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
5345 | ||
fba448c1 | 5346 | Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
8901d1ac GM |
5347 | `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
5348 | disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to | |
5349 | `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This | |
5350 | displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground | |
5351 | and background colors. | |
5352 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5353 | *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
5354 | Pascal) language. | |
5355 | ||
5356 | *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
5357 | the text at point. | |
5358 | ||
5359 | *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
5360 | ||
8d54eb69 DL |
5361 | *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
5362 | ||
732b9cdd GM |
5363 | *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
5364 | whitespace in a file. | |
a933dad1 | 5365 | |
ebcfda83 GM |
5366 | *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
5367 | files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
5368 | (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
5369 | interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
5370 | often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
5371 | uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
5372 | codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
5373 | ||
5374 | *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
5375 | ||
5376 | Here is an example of columns: | |
5377 | ||
5378 | horse apple bus | |
5379 | dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
5380 | porcupine strawberry airplane | |
5381 | ||
5382 | Doing the following settings: | |
5383 | ||
5384 | (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
5385 | (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
5386 | (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
5387 | (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
5388 | ||
5389 | ||
5390 | Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
5391 | ||
5392 | M-x delimit-columns-region | |
5393 | ||
5394 | It results: | |
5395 | ||
5396 | [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
5397 | [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
5398 | [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
5399 | ||
5400 | delim-col has the following options: | |
5401 | ||
5402 | delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
5403 | before all columns. | |
5404 | ||
5405 | delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
5406 | between each column. | |
5407 | ||
5408 | delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
5409 | after all columns. | |
5410 | ||
5411 | delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
5412 | each column. | |
5413 | ||
5414 | delim-col has the following commands: | |
5415 | ||
5416 | delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
5417 | delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
5418 | ||
2018166d DL |
5419 | *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were |
5420 | operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a | |
5421 | menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the | |
5422 | recent file list can be displayed: | |
f507826c | 5423 | |
31fc5d15 | 5424 | - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. |
8a33023e GM |
5425 | - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
5426 | - showing paths relative to the current default-directory | |
f507826c | 5427 | |
31fc5d15 GM |
5428 | The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to |
5429 | dynamically change the menu appearance. | |
f507826c | 5430 | |
8062f458 DL |
5431 | *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
5432 | text. | |
5433 | ||
36e24b82 | 5434 | *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
91735437 DL |
5435 | of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
5436 | specific to Message mode. | |
5437 | ||
36e24b82 DL |
5438 | *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
5439 | viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
5440 | with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
5441 | ||
aaa659ef DL |
5442 | *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
5443 | interface to access directory servers using different directory | |
5444 | protocols. It has a separate manual. | |
5445 | ||
eee54b0e DL |
5446 | *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
5447 | for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
5448 | ||
612839b6 GM |
5449 | *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
5450 | ||
5d94f558 | 5451 | *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
612839b6 | 5452 | minibuffer with completion. |
aaa659ef | 5453 | |
399da7e3 DL |
5454 | *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
5455 | with the diary features. | |
5456 | ||
6e417ca5 DL |
5457 | *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
5458 | numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
5459 | ||
4a27bdfb GM |
5460 | *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
5461 | Fill mode. | |
5462 | ||
dace60cf JW |
5463 | *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
5464 | facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main | |
5465 | difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning | |
5466 | they can be profiled, debugged, etc. | |
a18a342d | 5467 | |
9540ec3f EZ |
5468 | *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files. |
5469 | It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension | |
5470 | `.g'. | |
5471 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5472 | ** Changes in sort.el |
5473 | ||
5474 | The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' | |
5475 | as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The | |
5476 | new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default | |
5477 | numeric base. | |
5478 | ||
5479 | ** Changes to Ange-ftp | |
5480 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5481 | *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
5482 | names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash | |
5483 | sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
5484 | ||
5485 | *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive | |
5486 | ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
5487 | ||
5488 | *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which | |
5489 | output ^M at the end of lines. | |
5490 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5491 | ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor |
5492 | mode `iswitchb-mode'. | |
5493 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5494 | ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. |
5495 | If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with | |
5496 | `(msb-mode 1)'. | |
5497 | ||
5498 | ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom | |
5499 | group. | |
5500 | ||
5501 | ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the | |
5502 | behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values | |
5503 | are recognized: | |
5504 | ||
5505 | `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; | |
5506 | `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; | |
5507 | `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; | |
5508 | nil -- just delete one character. | |
5509 | ||
5510 | Default value is `untabify'. | |
5511 | ||
5512 | [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] | |
5513 | ||
5514 | ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face | |
5515 | symbol, not double-quoted. | |
5516 | ||
5517 | ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future | |
5518 | version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, | |
5519 | profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been | |
5520 | moved to lisp/obsolete. | |
5521 | ||
5522 | ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. | |
5523 | To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the | |
5524 | `auto-compression-mode' command. | |
5525 | ||
5526 | ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for | |
5527 | `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and | |
5528 | `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser. | |
5529 | ||
5530 | ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to | |
5531 | `browse-url-new-window-flag'. | |
5532 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5533 | ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
5534 | operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. | |
5535 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5536 | ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
5537 | is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. | |
5538 | ||
5539 | ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM | |
5540 | support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, | |
5541 | use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the | |
5542 | buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands | |
5543 | M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a | |
5544 | new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. | |
5545 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5546 | ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
5547 | a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
5548 | ||
5549 | ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters. | |
5550 | ||
5551 | The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the | |
5552 | file you are visiting in Hexl mode. | |
5553 | ||
5554 | ** Shell script mode changes. | |
5555 | ||
5556 | Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
5557 | derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and | |
5558 | sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
5559 | ||
5560 | ** Etags changes. | |
5561 | ||
5562 | *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
5563 | ||
5564 | *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now | |
5565 | possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with | |
5566 | {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. | |
5567 | This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains | |
5568 | a regular expression. The manual contains details. | |
5569 | ||
5570 | *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function | |
5571 | declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
5572 | ||
5573 | *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
5574 | "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. | |
5575 | ||
5576 | *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags | |
5577 | automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or | |
5578 | `template' keywords. | |
5579 | ||
5580 | *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in | |
5581 | C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. | |
5582 | ||
5583 | *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
5584 | types. | |
5585 | ||
5586 | *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. | |
5587 | ||
5588 | *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
5589 | ||
5590 | *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
5591 | are now tagged. | |
5592 | ||
5593 | *** In makefiles, tags the targets. | |
5594 | ||
5595 | *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
5596 | variables are tagged. | |
5597 | ||
5598 | *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
5599 | ||
5600 | *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is | |
5601 | for PSWrap. | |
5602 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5603 | ** Changes in etags.el |
5604 | ||
5605 | *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make | |
5606 | tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
5607 | is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
5608 | ||
5609 | *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting | |
5610 | the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. | |
5611 | ||
5612 | If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE | |
5613 | FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes | |
5614 | TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, | |
5615 | obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. | |
5616 | ||
5617 | TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. | |
5618 | ||
5619 | FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags | |
5620 | List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. | |
5621 | ||
5622 | A useful example value for this variable might be something like: | |
5623 | ||
5624 | '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) | |
5625 | ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) | |
5626 | ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) | |
5627 | ||
5628 | *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance | |
5629 | of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. | |
5630 | ||
5631 | *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the | |
5632 | names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. | |
5633 | ||
5634 | *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. | |
5635 | If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c | |
5636 | /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", | |
5637 | "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, | |
5638 | point will go to the beginning of the file. | |
5639 | ||
5640 | *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if | |
5641 | auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search | |
5642 | (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. | |
5643 | ||
5644 | *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point | |
5645 | in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is | |
5646 | found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. | |
5647 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5648 | ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
5649 | remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now | |
5650 | appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
5651 | ||
5652 | ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
5653 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5654 | ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
5655 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5656 | ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
5657 | containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular | |
5658 | expression from that list, are not checked. | |
5659 | ||
5660 | ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. | |
5661 | When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, | |
5662 | and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert | |
5663 | the buffer, just like for the local files. | |
5664 | ||
5665 | ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. | |
5666 | ||
efeb796b EZ |
5667 | ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
5668 | displays local abbrevs, only. | |
5669 | ||
965bc065 DL |
5670 | ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping |
5671 | paragraphs filled as you modify them. | |
5672 | ||
4e8864c7 GM |
5673 | ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse |
5674 | may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value | |
5675 | is measured in pixels. | |
5676 | ||
965bc065 DL |
5677 | ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files |
5678 | to be visited as images. | |
5679 | ||
68d0efa6 GM |
5680 | ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command' |
5681 | were added to compile.el. | |
5682 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5683 | ** Withdrawn packages |
5684 | ||
5685 | *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
5686 | functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
25a81338 | 5687 | |
3261c1d8 DL |
5688 | *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
5689 | ||
5690 | *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
ce75fd23 | 5691 | |
05197f40 | 5692 | \f |
01242779 DL |
5693 | * Incompatible Lisp changes |
5694 | ||
5695 | There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and | |
5696 | may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. | |
3b6936cc | 5697 | See the sections below for details. |
01242779 | 5698 | |
89d57763 | 5699 | ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
9b2a085d | 5700 | `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
bd1190d7 RS |
5701 | Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties' |
5702 | to remove the properties of the copy. | |
01242779 DL |
5703 | |
5704 | ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code | |
5705 | which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) | |
5706 | may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from | |
5707 | these properties are active. | |
5708 | ||
4dd4cc14 | 5709 | ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
01242779 | 5710 | ranges may affect some code. |
1c14ba45 DL |
5711 | |
5712 | ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook | |
5713 | buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might | |
5714 | make a difference to some code. | |
5715 | ||
4dd4cc14 DL |
5716 | ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
5717 | operates on the minibuffer. | |
5718 | ||
7c94ccf6 EZ |
5719 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
5720 | cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce | |
5721 | different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters | |
5722 | (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). | |
5723 | Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate | |
5724 | character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading | |
5725 | multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE | |
5726 | encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program | |
5727 | reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte | |
5728 | sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as | |
5729 | a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in | |
5730 | the buffer as multibyte characters. | |
5731 | ||
5732 | Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal | |
5733 | MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only | |
5734 | appropriate for reading truly binary files. | |
5735 | ||
7a39158f | 5736 | ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
3280fbe8 EZ |
5737 | `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
5738 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. | |
7a39158f DL |
5739 | |
5740 | ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as | |
539e74f9 EZ |
5741 | long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat', |
5742 | such as `mapconcat'. | |
7a39158f | 5743 | |
55bb62fd EZ |
5744 | ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte |
5745 | string. | |
5746 | ||
f34eb373 DL |
5747 | ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
5748 | extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new | |
5749 | dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than | |
5750 | one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard | |
5751 | charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes | |
5752 | the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule | |
028d739a DL |
5753 | encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
5754 | probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. | |
3478eafc | 5755 | |
98384b7b EZ |
5756 | ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal. |
5757 | Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be | |
5758 | aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should | |
5759 | not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and | |
5760 | on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the | |
5761 | behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It | |
5762 | turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to | |
5763 | remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well | |
5764 | advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value | |
5765 | will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed. | |
7cd5f1e7 | 5766 | |
05197f40 | 5767 | \f |
ce75fd23 GM |
5768 | * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
5769 | (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) | |
5770 | ||
e3b22517 GM |
5771 | ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all. |
5772 | ||
1ff74324 | 5773 | ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el |
9e5a7f2a GM |
5774 | allows the animated display of strings. |
5775 | ||
ed31fabf GM |
5776 | ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the |
5777 | interactive form of a function. | |
5778 | ||
2018166d DL |
5779 | ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
5780 | between custom options. Example: | |
5781 | ||
5782 | (defcustom default-input-method nil | |
5783 | "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). | |
5784 | This is the input method activated automatically by the command | |
5785 | `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." | |
5786 | :group 'mule | |
5787 | :type '(choice (const nil) string) | |
5788 | :set-after '(current-language-environment)) | |
5789 | ||
5790 | This specifies that default-input-method should be set after | |
5791 | current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears | |
5792 | first in a custom-set-variables statement. | |
5793 | ||
f3780fe4 | 5794 | ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
a758f97d GM |
5795 | function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
5796 | args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated | |
5797 | (signal or normal termination). | |
5798 | ||
023045d6 DL |
5799 | ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements |
5800 | from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. | |
5801 | ||
eb1b0c74 GM |
5802 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
5803 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
5804 | ||
52d89894 GM |
5805 | ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies |
5806 | alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. | |
5807 | ||
693c4692 | 5808 | ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
4301cf66 | 5809 | |
6bc92b2e GM |
5810 | ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
5811 | deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame | |
5812 | being deleted. | |
5813 | ||
39e776cd SM |
5814 | ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
5815 | ||
1396138a | 5816 | ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
a18a342d DL |
5817 | If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
5818 | skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends | |
5819 | with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is | |
5820 | C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's | |
5821 | charset. | |
5822 | ||
4fbdfdcf MB |
5823 | ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in |
5824 | the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the | |
5825 | message. | |
5826 | ||
6a0b0752 MB |
5827 | ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
5828 | expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. | |
5829 | ||
47e351a3 GM |
5830 | ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
5831 | with the more general `:mask' property. | |
5832 | ||
f864120f | 5833 | ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
ba9eeda1 | 5834 | |
a2bd77b8 GM |
5835 | ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
5836 | backslash. | |
5837 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
5838 | ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
5839 | is running in batch mode. For example, | |
5840 | ||
5841 | (message "%s" (read t)) | |
5842 | ||
5843 | will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result | |
5844 | to standard output. | |
5845 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
5846 | ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', |
5847 | `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. | |
5848 | ||
ead53494 GM |
5849 | ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
5850 | will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new | |
5851 | frame or window. | |
5852 | ||
27848c01 GM |
5853 | ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
5854 | were added | |
5855 | ||
5856 | - Function: remove ELT SEQ | |
5857 | ||
8a33023e | 5858 | Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
27848c01 GM |
5859 | a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
5860 | ||
5861 | - Function: remq ELT LIST | |
5862 | ||
8a33023e | 5863 | Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
27848c01 GM |
5864 | comparison is done with `eq'. |
5865 | ||
5866 | ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. | |
3ab82477 | 5867 | |
b548072f | 5868 | ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
c8682017 | 5869 | has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and |
6b61353c | 5870 | `key-and-value', in addition to `nil', `key', `value', and `t'. |
b548072f | 5871 | |
07b14857 KH |
5872 | ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
5873 | without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may | |
5874 | convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. | |
5875 | ||
9662da0b GM |
5876 | ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
5877 | or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. | |
d5aa31d8 | 5878 | |
7fce7efb DL |
5879 | ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
5880 | function was declared obsolete. | |
5881 | ||
5d94f558 | 5882 | ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
7fce7efb DL |
5883 | retained as an alias). |
5884 | ||
f98d3086 SM |
5885 | ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
5886 | It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result | |
5887 | is automatically converted to Emacs' form. | |
5888 | ||
87efd256 GM |
5889 | ** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
5890 | ||
39b39373 GM |
5891 | - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
5892 | ||
5893 | Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or | |
5894 | omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use | |
5895 | the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, | |
5896 | even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the | |
5897 | minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t | |
5898 | means never include the minibuffer window. | |
87efd256 | 5899 | |
a56ebb90 | 5900 | ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows |
67c9a1d2 | 5901 | |
a56ebb90 | 5902 | - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT |
67c9a1d2 GM |
5903 | |
5904 | Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. | |
5905 | ||
5906 | This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', | |
5907 | calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as | |
5908 | argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil | |
5909 | value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is | |
5910 | returned. | |
5911 | ||
5912 | Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even | |
5913 | if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff | |
5914 | it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the | |
5915 | minibuffer even if it is active. | |
5916 | ||
5917 | Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer | |
5918 | counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count | |
5919 | too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame | |
5920 | and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, | |
5921 | `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you | |
5922 | entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. | |
5923 | ||
5924 | ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. | |
5925 | ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. | |
5926 | ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. | |
5927 | ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. | |
5928 | ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. | |
5929 | If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. | |
5930 | Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. | |
5931 | ||
ead53494 GM |
5932 | ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
5933 | event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional | |
5934 | argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. | |
dce6b995 | 5935 | |
25fa6deb GM |
5936 | ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
5937 | call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that | |
088831a6 GM |
5938 | message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
5939 | Default value is nil. | |
25fa6deb | 5940 | |
5d94f558 | 5941 | ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
1681ead6 GM |
5942 | meaning no limit. |
5943 | ||
5b034b7f EZ |
5944 | ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls |
5945 | the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line | |
5946 | numbers in the mode line. The default is 200. | |
5947 | ||
5d94f558 | 5948 | ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
c08398de DL |
5949 | coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
5950 | DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, | |
5951 | ||
9b2999d0 DL |
5952 | ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument |
5953 | list of a primitive. | |
de370c4c | 5954 | |
c286608e SM |
5955 | ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
5956 | ||
80c05bd3 DL |
5957 | ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
5958 | buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. | |
5959 | This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather | |
5960 | than replacing the local map. | |
5961 | ||
14fd0da3 DL |
5962 | ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
5963 | `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been | |
5964 | removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' | |
5965 | instead. | |
45f485a6 GM |
5966 | |
5967 | ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. | |
5968 | ||
c286608e SM |
5969 | ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
5970 | as promised long ago. | |
f0298744 | 5971 | |
5d94f558 | 5972 | ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
ac57988b GM |
5973 | |
5974 | ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems | |
5975 | for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but | |
5976 | patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names. | |
5977 | ||
05197f40 | 5978 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
5979 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
5980 | ||
6260538e GM |
5981 | ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for |
5982 | regular expressions. | |
5983 | ||
5984 | - Function: rx-to-string SEXP | |
5985 | ||
5986 | Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. | |
5987 | ||
5988 | - Macro: rx SEXP | |
5989 | ||
5990 | Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. | |
5991 | ||
5992 | The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp | |
5993 | notation. | |
5994 | ||
5995 | STRING | |
5996 | matches string STRING literally. | |
5997 | ||
5998 | CHAR | |
5999 | matches character CHAR literally. | |
6000 | ||
6001 | `not-newline' | |
6002 | matches any character except a newline. | |
6003 | . | |
6004 | `anything' | |
6005 | matches any character | |
6006 | ||
6007 | `(any SET)' | |
6008 | matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string. | |
6009 | Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings. | |
6010 | ||
79014980 | 6011 | '(in SET)' |
6260538e GM |
6012 | like `any'. |
6013 | ||
6014 | `(not (any SET))' | |
6015 | matches any character not in SET | |
6016 | ||
6017 | `line-start' | |
6018 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line | |
6019 | in the text being matched | |
6020 | ||
6021 | `line-end' | |
6022 | is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line | |
6023 | ||
6024 | `string-start' | |
6025 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the | |
6026 | string being matched against. | |
6027 | ||
6028 | `string-end' | |
6029 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of the | |
6030 | string being matched against. | |
6031 | ||
6032 | `buffer-start' | |
6033 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the | |
6034 | buffer being matched against. | |
6035 | ||
6036 | `buffer-end' | |
6037 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of the | |
6038 | buffer being matched against. | |
6039 | ||
6040 | `point' | |
6041 | matches the empty string, but only at point. | |
6042 | ||
6043 | `word-start' | |
6044 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a | |
6045 | word. | |
6046 | ||
6047 | `word-end' | |
6048 | matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. | |
6049 | ||
6050 | `word-boundary' | |
6051 | matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a | |
6052 | word. | |
6053 | ||
6054 | `(not word-boundary)' | |
6055 | matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a | |
6056 | word. | |
6057 | ||
6058 | `digit' | |
6059 | matches 0 through 9. | |
6060 | ||
6061 | `control' | |
6062 | matches ASCII control characters. | |
6063 | ||
6064 | `hex-digit' | |
6065 | matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
6066 | ||
6067 | `blank' | |
6068 | matches space and tab only. | |
6069 | ||
6070 | `graphic' | |
6071 | matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
6072 | space, and DEL. | |
6073 | ||
6074 | `printing' | |
6075 | matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
6076 | and DEL. | |
6077 | ||
6078 | `alphanumeric' | |
6079 | matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
6080 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
6081 | ||
6082 | `letter' | |
6083 | matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
6084 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
6085 | ||
6086 | `ascii' | |
6087 | matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
6088 | ||
6089 | `nonascii' | |
6090 | matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
6091 | ||
6092 | `lower' | |
6093 | matches anything lower-case. | |
6094 | ||
6095 | `upper' | |
6096 | matches anything upper-case. | |
6097 | ||
6098 | `punctuation' | |
6099 | matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
6100 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
6101 | ||
6102 | `space' | |
6103 | matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
6104 | ||
6105 | `word' | |
6106 | matches anything that has word syntax. | |
6107 | ||
6108 | `(syntax SYNTAX)' | |
6109 | matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one | |
6110 | of the following symbols. | |
6111 | ||
6112 | `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation) | |
6113 | `punctuation' (\\s.) | |
6114 | `word' (\\sw) | |
6115 | `symbol' (\\s_) | |
6116 | `open-parenthesis' (\\s() | |
6117 | `close-parenthesis' (\\s)) | |
6118 | `expression-prefix' (\\s') | |
6119 | `string-quote' (\\s\") | |
6120 | `paired-delimiter' (\\s$) | |
6121 | `escape' (\\s\\) | |
6122 | `character-quote' (\\s/) | |
6123 | `comment-start' (\\s<) | |
6124 | `comment-end' (\\s>) | |
6125 | ||
6126 | `(not (syntax SYNTAX))' | |
6127 | matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX. | |
6128 | ||
6129 | `(category CATEGORY)' | |
6130 | matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be | |
6131 | either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols. | |
6132 | ||
6133 | `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation) | |
6134 | `base-vowel' (\\c1) | |
6135 | `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2) | |
6136 | `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3) | |
6137 | `tone-mark' (\\c4) | |
6138 | `symbol' (\\c5) | |
6139 | `digit' (\\c6) | |
6140 | `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7) | |
6141 | `vowel-sign' (\\c8) | |
6142 | `semivowel-lower' (\\c9) | |
6143 | `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<) | |
6144 | `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>) | |
6145 | `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA) | |
6146 | `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC) | |
6147 | `greek-two-byte' (\\cG) | |
6148 | `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH) | |
175573ac | 6149 | `indian-two-byte' (\\cI) |
6260538e GM |
6150 | `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK) |
6151 | `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN) | |
6152 | `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY) | |
6153 | `ascii' (\\ca) | |
6154 | `arabic' (\\cb) | |
6155 | `chinese' (\\cc) | |
6156 | `ethiopic' (\\ce) | |
6157 | `greek' (\\cg) | |
6158 | `korean' (\\ch) | |
6159 | `indian' (\\ci) | |
6160 | `japanese' (\\cj) | |
6161 | `japanese-katakana' (\\ck) | |
6162 | `latin' (\\cl) | |
6163 | `lao' (\\co) | |
6164 | `tibetan' (\\cq) | |
6165 | `japanese-roman' (\\cr) | |
6166 | `thai' (\\ct) | |
6167 | `vietnamese' (\\cv) | |
6168 | `hebrew' (\\cw) | |
6169 | `cyrillic' (\\cy) | |
6170 | `can-break' (\\c|) | |
6171 | ||
6172 | `(not (category CATEGORY))' | |
6173 | matches a character that has not category CATEGORY. | |
6174 | ||
6175 | `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
6176 | matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc. | |
6177 | ||
6178 | `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
6179 | like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end', | |
6180 | `match-beginning', and `match-string'. | |
6181 | ||
6182 | `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
6183 | another name for `submatch'. | |
6184 | ||
6185 | `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
6186 | matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all | |
6187 | args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting | |
6188 | regular expression. | |
6189 | ||
6190 | `(minimal-match SEXP)' | |
6191 | produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching | |
e0e7f2d5 | 6192 | zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they |
6260538e GM |
6193 | match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can |
6194 | still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible. | |
6195 | ||
6196 | `(maximal-match SEXP)' | |
c3518b63 | 6197 | produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default. |
6260538e GM |
6198 | |
6199 | `(zero-or-more SEXP)' | |
6200 | matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
6201 | ||
6202 | `(0+ SEXP)' | |
6203 | like `zero-or-more'. | |
6204 | ||
6205 | `(* SEXP)' | |
6206 | like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
6207 | ||
6208 | `(*? SEXP)' | |
6209 | like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
6210 | ||
6211 | `(one-or-more SEXP)' | |
6212 | matches one or more occurrences of A. | |
79014980 | 6213 | |
6260538e GM |
6214 | `(1+ SEXP)' |
6215 | like `one-or-more'. | |
6216 | ||
6217 | `(+ SEXP)' | |
6218 | like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
6219 | ||
6220 | `(+? SEXP)' | |
6221 | like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
6222 | ||
6223 | `(zero-or-one SEXP)' | |
6224 | matches zero or one occurrences of A. | |
79014980 | 6225 | |
6260538e GM |
6226 | `(optional SEXP)' |
6227 | like `zero-or-one'. | |
6228 | ||
6229 | `(? SEXP)' | |
6230 | like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
6231 | ||
6232 | `(?? SEXP)' | |
6233 | like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
6234 | ||
6235 | `(repeat N SEXP)' | |
6236 | matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
6237 | ||
6238 | `(repeat N M SEXP)' | |
6239 | matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
6240 | ||
6241 | `(eval FORM)' | |
c3518b63 | 6242 | evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string, |
6260538e GM |
6243 | `regexp-quote' it. |
6244 | ||
6245 | `(regexp REGEXP)' | |
6246 | include REGEXP in string notation in the result. | |
6247 | ||
697617d9 GM |
6248 | *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. |
6249 | ||
85c75536 MB |
6250 | *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
6251 | buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside | |
6252 | the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved | |
6253 | restriction to be restored incorrectly. | |
6254 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
6255 | *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
6256 | `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list | |
028d739a | 6257 | when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
0b8a3a6d DL |
6258 | multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
6259 | ||
fb2c6a6b | 6260 | *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and |
58008c36 EZ |
6261 | `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string |
6262 | if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. | |
0b8a3a6d DL |
6263 | |
6264 | *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is | |
6265 | changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern | |
6266 | [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character | |
6267 | regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if | |
6268 | the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the | |
6269 | extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra | |
6270 | bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset | |
6271 | eight-bit-graphic. | |
6272 | ||
6273 | ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. | |
6274 | ||
9b2a085d | 6275 | A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
0b8a3a6d DL |
6276 | a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
6277 | character set as previously. | |
6278 | ||
6279 | *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. | |
6280 | They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function | |
6281 | modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. | |
6282 | ||
6283 | CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic | |
6284 | characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the | |
6285 | range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that | |
6286 | case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. | |
6287 | ||
6288 | FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family | |
9b2a085d | 6289 | name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
0b8a3a6d DL |
6290 | |
6291 | *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset | |
6292 | registries of character sets are set in the default fontset | |
6293 | "fontset-default". | |
6294 | ||
6295 | *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second | |
6296 | argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. | |
6297 | ||
6298 | ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character | |
6299 | composition is done by a special text property `composition' in | |
6300 | buffers and strings. | |
6301 | ||
6302 | *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite | |
6303 | character' which is an independent character with a unique character | |
6304 | code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' | |
6305 | have been deleted: composite-char-component, | |
6306 | composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, | |
6307 | composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. | |
6308 | The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have | |
6309 | also been deleted. | |
6310 | ||
6311 | *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to | |
6312 | specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable | |
6313 | `reference-point-alist' for more detail. | |
6314 | ||
6315 | *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and | |
6316 | MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a | |
6317 | composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters | |
6318 | may differ between buffer and string text. | |
6319 | ||
6320 | *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, | |
6321 | COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. | |
6322 | ||
6323 | *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' | |
6324 | directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. | |
6325 | Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property | |
6326 | `composition' from STRING. | |
6327 | ||
6328 | *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about | |
6329 | a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. | |
6330 | ||
6331 | *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as | |
6332 | obsolete. | |
6333 | ||
889be0a1 DL |
6334 | ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
6335 | the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. | |
6336 | ||
965bc065 | 6337 | ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
1e36ff68 DL |
6338 | `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
6339 | introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, | |
6340 | U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. | |
0b8a3a6d | 6341 | |
3d7a4ec8 EZ |
6342 | Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so |
6343 | characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew, | |
6344 | etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are | |
6345 | different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text | |
6346 | which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be | |
6347 | encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system. | |
6348 | ||
6349 | ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. | |
6350 | It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For | |
6351 | details, please see the documentation string of this coding system. | |
23cfab61 | 6352 | |
0b8a3a6d | 6353 | ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
1e36ff68 DL |
6354 | `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
6355 | standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. | |
6356 | ||
6357 | ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' | |
6358 | have been introduced. | |
0b8a3a6d | 6359 | |
0b8a3a6d | 6360 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
1e36ff68 | 6361 | have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
028d739a DL |
6362 | 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
6363 | eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the | |
6364 | emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the | |
2018166d DL |
6365 | buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for |
6366 | eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string | |
6367 | must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to | |
6368 | their multibyte equivalent. | |
0b8a3a6d | 6369 | |
f0124b4a DL |
6370 | ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
6371 | that offset in the file before writing. | |
6372 | ||
f98d3086 SM |
6373 | ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
6374 | compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). | |
7464346d | 6375 | |
612839b6 GM |
6376 | ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
6377 | `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
6378 | from which the command was issued. | |
6379 | ||
6380 | ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
6381 | `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
6382 | `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
6383 | additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
6384 | operate on. | |
6385 | ||
271b4185 GM |
6386 | ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
6387 | to `window-buffer-height'. | |
6388 | ||
6389 | - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
6390 | ||
6391 | Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
6392 | The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
6393 | lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
6394 | ||
6395 | Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
6396 | respectively. | |
6397 | ||
8a33023e | 6398 | If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
271b4185 GM |
6399 | COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
6400 | ||
6401 | The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
6402 | obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
6403 | on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
6404 | ||
6405 | Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
6406 | buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
6407 | possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
6408 | is currently displayed in some window. | |
6409 | ||
3c30cb6e DL |
6410 | ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
6411 | argument function's results. | |
6412 | ||
62f20204 | 6413 | ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
55bb62fd | 6414 | signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also, |
c8682017 EZ |
6415 | `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs |
6416 | 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte | |
55bb62fd | 6417 | sequence). |
62f20204 | 6418 | |
c0510d27 | 6419 | ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
b4da8dfa | 6420 | header in the list of headers passed to it. |
c0510d27 GM |
6421 | |
6422 | ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
6423 | ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
6424 | ||
6425 | ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
19d1bc27 GM |
6426 | cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
6427 | as follows: | |
6428 | ||
6429 | t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
6430 | nil don't display a cursor | |
6431 | `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
6432 | (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
6433 | others display a box cursor. | |
6434 | ||
9a0dd3dc GM |
6435 | ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
6436 | an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
6437 | defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
6438 | set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
6439 | ||
d7b511c4 | 6440 | ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
dc1178bf | 6441 | specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
d7b511c4 GM |
6442 | the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
6443 | text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
6444 | ||
6445 | Example: | |
6446 | ||
6447 | (string-to-syntax "()") | |
6448 | => (4 . 41) | |
6449 | ||
1fa28578 GM |
6450 | ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
6451 | other than 10. | |
6452 | ||
6453 | *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
6454 | INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
6455 | ||
5d94f558 | 6456 | #b1111 |
1fa28578 | 6457 | => 15 |
5d94f558 | 6458 | #b-1111 |
1fa28578 GM |
6459 | => -15 |
6460 | ||
6461 | *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
6462 | ||
5d94f558 | 6463 | #o666 |
1fa28578 GM |
6464 | => 438 |
6465 | ||
6466 | *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
6467 | ||
5d94f558 | 6468 | #xbeef |
1fa28578 GM |
6469 | => 48815 |
6470 | ||
6471 | *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
6472 | ||
5d94f558 | 6473 | #2R-111 |
1fa28578 | 6474 | => -7 |
5d94f558 | 6475 | #25rah |
1fa28578 GM |
6476 | => 267 |
6477 | ||
3d4ff2dd | 6478 | ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
f98d3086 | 6479 | the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
e9b4e5ff GM |
6480 | and isn't a string. |
6481 | ||
3d4ff2dd GM |
6482 | ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
6483 | a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
6484 | value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
6485 | not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
6486 | ||
16ce590d DL |
6487 | ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
6488 | ||
73825616 | 6489 | ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
16ce590d DL |
6490 | for a regexp in a string. |
6491 | ||
6492 | ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook | |
6493 | `mouse-position-function'. | |
6494 | ||
723e779c GM |
6495 | ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
6496 | that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
6497 | ||
d1e103b2 GM |
6498 | ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
6499 | Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
6500 | ||
31047e0d DL |
6501 | ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and |
6502 | returns it. | |
6503 | ||
7a85e4df GM |
6504 | ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
6505 | returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
6506 | ||
02b14400 RS |
6507 | ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
6508 | can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. | |
3a426197 | 6509 | Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a |
02b14400 RS |
6510 | etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
6511 | mode. | |
404fa7d6 | 6512 | |
8964fec7 SM |
6513 | ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
6514 | and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. | |
6515 | ||
02b14400 RS |
6516 | ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
6517 | has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook | |
6518 | function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it | |
6519 | returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has | |
6520 | been performed." | |
6521 | ||
6522 | When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, | |
6523 | and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the | |
6524 | hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, | |
6525 | then the self-inserting character is not inserted. | |
ef961722 | 6526 | |
81da8b32 GM |
6527 | ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
6528 | In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
6529 | and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
6530 | ||
9e207b90 GM |
6531 | ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
6532 | with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
6533 | specified table. | |
6534 | ||
6535 | (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
6536 | ||
6537 | Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
03d9c64c GM |
6538 | TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
6539 | saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is | |
6540 | what BODY returns. | |
9e207b90 | 6541 | |
d7f89643 | 6542 | ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
95cd4c40 | 6543 | Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
8a33023e | 6544 | Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
601e0081 SM |
6545 | corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
6546 | Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). | |
8964fec7 | 6547 | |
dde9e75a GM |
6548 | ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
6549 | removed since it wasn't used by anything. | |
6550 | ||
9da30515 GM |
6551 | ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
6552 | instead of being optional. | |
6553 | ||
d20679eb GM |
6554 | ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
6555 | modify read-only text. | |
6556 | ||
fbc164de PE |
6557 | ** New functions and variables for locales. |
6558 | ||
6559 | The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and | |
6560 | decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and | |
b718982a PE |
6561 | time functions like strftime. The new variables |
6562 | `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system | |
6563 | locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. | |
fbc164de PE |
6564 | |
6565 | The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language | |
6566 | environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from | |
6567 | the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG | |
b718982a PE |
6568 | environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
6569 | not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables | |
6570 | `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and | |
6571 | `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. | |
fbc164de | 6572 | |
863476d1 SM |
6573 | ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
6574 | To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' | |
6575 | modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment | |
6576 | start sequences. | |
6577 | ||
ef6d912c GM |
6578 | ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
6579 | because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. | |
6580 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6581 | ** New function `propertize' |
6582 | ||
6583 | The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
6584 | strings with text properties. | |
6585 | ||
6586 | - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
6587 | ||
6588 | Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
6589 | by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
6590 | PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
6591 | specified value of that property. Example: | |
6592 | ||
6593 | (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
6594 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6595 | ** push and pop macros. |
6596 | ||
02b14400 RS |
6597 | Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
6598 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols | |
a933dad1 DL |
6599 | as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
6600 | ||
6601 | (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
6602 | (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
6603 | (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
6604 | ||
02b14400 RS |
6605 | ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
6606 | ||
6c7fd5aa RS |
6607 | Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
6608 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. | |
02b14400 RS |
6609 | |
6610 | (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
6611 | Execute body once for each element of LIST, | |
6612 | using the variable VAR to hold the current element. | |
6613 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
6614 | ||
6615 | (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
6616 | Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, | |
6617 | inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. | |
6618 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
6619 | ||
6c083b4c GM |
6620 | ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
6621 | [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character | |
6622 | class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period | |
6623 | or a sign. | |
a933dad1 DL |
6624 | |
6625 | [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
6626 | [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
6627 | [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
6628 | [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
6629 | [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
6630 | space, and DEL. | |
6631 | [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
6632 | and DEL. | |
6633 | [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
6634 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
6635 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
6636 | [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
6637 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
6638 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
6639 | [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
6640 | [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
6641 | [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
6642 | [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
6643 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
6644 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
6645 | [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
6646 | [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
6647 | [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
6648 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6649 | ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. |
6650 | ||
6651 | The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
6652 | ||
6653 | - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
6654 | ||
6655 | The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
6656 | are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
6657 | ||
6658 | :test TEST | |
6659 | ||
6660 | TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
6661 | Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
6662 | it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
6663 | ||
6664 | :size SIZE | |
6665 | ||
6666 | SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
6667 | many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
6668 | ||
6669 | :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
6670 | ||
6671 | REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
6672 | full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
6673 | size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
6674 | 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
6675 | old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
6676 | ||
6677 | :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
6678 | ||
6679 | THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
6680 | hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
6681 | (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
6682 | ||
6683 | :weakness WEAK | |
6684 | ||
b548072f GM |
6685 | WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
6686 | `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as | |
6687 | `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage | |
6688 | collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere | |
6689 | outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
a933dad1 DL |
6690 | |
6691 | - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
6692 | ||
6693 | Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
6694 | ||
6695 | - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
6696 | ||
6697 | Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
6698 | ||
6699 | - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
6700 | ||
6701 | Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
6702 | values are shared. | |
6703 | ||
6704 | - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
6705 | ||
6706 | Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
6707 | ||
6708 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
6709 | ||
6710 | Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
6711 | ||
6712 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
6713 | ||
6714 | Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
6715 | ||
6716 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
6717 | ||
6718 | Returns the size of TABLE. | |
6719 | ||
d96d6bb0 | 6720 | - Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
a933dad1 DL |
6721 | |
6722 | Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
6723 | ||
6724 | - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
6725 | ||
6726 | Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
6727 | ||
6728 | - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
6729 | ||
6730 | Clear TABLE. | |
6731 | ||
6732 | - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
6733 | ||
6734 | Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
6735 | not found. | |
6736 | ||
79214ddf | 6737 | - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
a933dad1 DL |
6738 | |
6739 | Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
6740 | another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
6741 | ||
6742 | - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
6743 | ||
6744 | Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
6745 | ||
6746 | - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
6747 | ||
6748 | Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
6749 | arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
6750 | ||
6751 | - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
6752 | ||
6753 | Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
6754 | ||
6755 | - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
6756 | ||
6757 | Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
6758 | a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
79214ddf | 6759 | comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
a933dad1 DL |
6760 | and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
6761 | of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
6762 | ||
6763 | TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
6764 | ||
6765 | HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
6766 | code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
6767 | integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
6768 | ||
6769 | Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
6770 | be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
6771 | ||
6772 | (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
6773 | (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
6774 | ||
6775 | (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
6776 | (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
6777 | ||
79214ddf | 6778 | (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
a933dad1 DL |
6779 | 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
6780 | ||
6781 | (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
6782 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6783 | ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. |
6784 | ||
6785 | It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
6786 | circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
6787 | a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
6788 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6789 | ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. |
6790 | ||
6791 | If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
6792 | #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
6793 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6794 | ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or |
6795 | t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
6796 | specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
6797 | is too short to reach that column. | |
6798 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6799 | ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may |
6800 | now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
6801 | after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
6802 | two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
6803 | ||
6804 | If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
6805 | perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
6806 | and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
6807 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6808 | ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument |
6809 | to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
6810 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6811 | ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook |
6812 | calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
6813 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6814 | ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a |
6815 | directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
6816 | small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
6817 | small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
6818 | temporary-file-directory instead. | |
6819 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6820 | ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all |
6821 | the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
6822 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
6823 | hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
6824 | ||
2018166d DL |
6825 | ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
6826 | elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. | |
a933dad1 | 6827 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6828 | ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. |
6829 | ||
6830 | make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
6831 | creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
6832 | ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
6833 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6834 | ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' |
6835 | ||
6836 | The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
6837 | on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
6838 | is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
6839 | never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
6840 | ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
6841 | overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
6842 | ||
6843 | If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
6844 | that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
6845 | to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
6846 | The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
6847 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6848 | ** Function `format' now handles text properties. |
6849 | ||
6850 | Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
6851 | If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
6852 | ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
6853 | result string. | |
6854 | ||
6855 | Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
6856 | string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
6857 | ||
6858 | Example: | |
6859 | ||
6860 | (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
6861 | (s2 "world")) | |
6862 | (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
6863 | (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
b246b1f6 | 6864 | (format s1 s2)) |
a933dad1 DL |
6865 | |
6866 | results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
6867 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6868 | ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. |
6869 | ||
6870 | Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
6871 | The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
6872 | argument in it. | |
6873 | ||
6874 | (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
6875 | (arg "world")) | |
6876 | (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
6877 | (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
6878 | (message msg arg)) | |
6879 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6880 | ** Sound support |
6881 | ||
6882 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
6883 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
6884 | ||
6885 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
6886 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
6887 | to enable sound support. | |
6888 | ||
6889 | Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
6890 | list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
6891 | when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
6892 | functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
6893 | sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
6894 | ||
6895 | The following sound properties are supported: | |
6896 | ||
6897 | - `:file FILE' | |
6898 | ||
6899 | FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
6900 | searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
6901 | ||
6fb40beb GM |
6902 | - `:data DATA' |
6903 | ||
6904 | DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
6905 | may be present, but not both. | |
6906 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6907 | - `:volume VOLUME' |
6908 | ||
6909 | VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
6910 | 0..1. This property is optional. | |
6911 | ||
01242779 DL |
6912 | - `:device DEVICE' |
6913 | ||
6914 | DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the | |
6915 | sound. The default device is system-dependent. | |
6916 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
6917 | Other properties are ignored. |
6918 | ||
01242779 DL |
6919 | An alternative interface is called as |
6920 | (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). | |
6921 | ||
a933dad1 | 6922 | ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
356673d4 DL |
6923 | |
6924 | ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
6925 | a keyword symbol. | |
fc91dc2d GM |
6926 | |
6927 | ** Changes to garbage collection | |
6928 | ||
6929 | *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number | |
6930 | of live and free strings. | |
6931 | ||
6932 | *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of | |
6933 | strings that have been consed so far. | |
6934 | ||
05197f40 | 6935 | \f |
04545643 GM |
6936 | * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
6937 | Lisp Manual | |
6938 | ||
a299a6f0 GM |
6939 | ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
6940 | mini-windows. | |
6941 | ||
26fcde61 MB |
6942 | ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
6943 | argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is | |
6944 | returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. | |
ea4c1b7c | 6945 | |
a299a6f0 | 6946 | ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
82a452c8 | 6947 | |
9a8d84ca | 6948 | ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. |
2c69ced2 GM |
6949 | |
6950 | ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an | |
6951 | image. | |
6952 | ||
6953 | - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME | |
6954 | ||
6955 | Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). | |
6956 | ||
6957 | SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes | |
6958 | measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical | |
6959 | character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default | |
6960 | font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. | |
6961 | FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
6962 | ||
ebb8f116 GM |
6963 | ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
6964 | has a mask bitmap. | |
6965 | ||
6966 | - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME | |
6967 | ||
6968 | Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. | |
6969 | FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil | |
6970 | or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
6971 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
6972 | ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
6973 | satisfying one of a list of specifications. | |
6974 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
6975 | ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now |
6976 | optional. | |
6977 | ||
f6499c03 DL |
6978 | ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see |
6979 | below). | |
04545643 | 6980 | |
05197f40 | 6981 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
6982 | * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
6983 | ||
f6d3257b GM |
6984 | ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
6985 | to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
6986 | ||
6987 | Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
6988 | text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
6989 | is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
6990 | your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
6991 | laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
6992 | just display it black instead. | |
6993 | ||
6994 | This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
6995 | a line like | |
6996 | ||
6997 | (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
6998 | ||
6999 | in your `.emacs'. | |
7000 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7001 | ** New face implementation. |
7002 | ||
7003 | Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
7004 | font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
7005 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7006 | *** New faces. |
7007 | ||
7008 | Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
7009 | ||
7010 | 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
79214ddf | 7011 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7012 | 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
7013 | width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
79214ddf | 7014 | |
a933dad1 | 7015 | 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
79214ddf | 7016 | |
a933dad1 | 7017 | 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
79214ddf | 7018 | |
a933dad1 | 7019 | 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
79214ddf | 7020 | |
a933dad1 | 7021 | 6. Foreground color. |
79214ddf | 7022 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7023 | 7. Background color. |
7024 | ||
7025 | 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
7026 | ||
7027 | 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
7028 | ||
7029 | 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
7030 | ||
7031 | 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
7032 | ||
7033 | 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
7034 | color. | |
7035 | ||
7036 | 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
7037 | color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
7038 | ||
7039 | Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
7040 | same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
7041 | frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
7042 | faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
0969bd6a | 7043 | with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
a933dad1 DL |
7044 | attributes mentioned above. |
7045 | ||
7046 | There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
7047 | definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
7048 | created frames. | |
79214ddf | 7049 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7050 | A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
7051 | have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
7052 | `fully-specified'. | |
7053 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7054 | *** Face merging. |
7055 | ||
7056 | The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
7057 | combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
7058 | aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
7059 | properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
7060 | that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
7061 | results in a fully-specified face. | |
7062 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7063 | *** Face realization. |
7064 | ||
7065 | After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
7066 | merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
7067 | realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
7068 | available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
7069 | face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
7070 | cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
7071 | ||
7072 | Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
7073 | character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
7074 | for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
7075 | charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
7076 | ||
7077 | Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
7078 | specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
7079 | being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
7080 | the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
7081 | statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
7082 | ||
7083 | In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
7084 | `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
7085 | 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
7086 | the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
7087 | initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
7088 | Emacs. | |
7089 | ||
7090 | Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
7091 | `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
7092 | registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
7093 | with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
7094 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7095 | **** Clearing face caches. |
7096 | ||
7097 | The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
7098 | on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
7099 | unused fonts. | |
7100 | ||
a933dad1 | 7101 | *** Font selection. |
79214ddf | 7102 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7103 | Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
7104 | given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
7105 | for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
7106 | ||
7107 | If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
7108 | pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
7109 | family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
7110 | property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
7111 | an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
7112 | ||
7113 | Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
7114 | against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
7115 | match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
7116 | ||
7117 | Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
7118 | ||
7119 | The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
7120 | attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
7121 | face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
7122 | names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
7123 | that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
7124 | width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
7125 | to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
7126 | ||
52d89894 GM |
7127 | Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
7128 | alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face | |
89d57763 | 7129 | doesn't exist. |
af4bb4c8 KH |
7130 | |
7131 | Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify | |
8a33023e | 7132 | all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
af4bb4c8 KH |
7133 | registry. |
7134 | ||
8a33023e | 7135 | Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
af4bb4c8 KH |
7136 | slightly different. |
7137 | ||
7138 | Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. | |
7139 | ||
a933dad1 | 7140 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7141 | **** Scalable fonts |
7142 | ||
7143 | Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
7144 | since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
7145 | servers. | |
7146 | ||
7147 | To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
b246b1f6 | 7148 | `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
a933dad1 DL |
7149 | scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
7150 | Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
7151 | scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
7152 | that list. Example: | |
7153 | ||
7154 | (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
7155 | ||
7156 | allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
7157 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7158 | *** Functions and variables related to font selection. |
7159 | ||
7160 | - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
7161 | ||
7162 | Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
7163 | is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
7164 | string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
7165 | ||
7166 | If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
7167 | the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
7168 | FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
7169 | POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
7170 | SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
7171 | These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
7172 | if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
7173 | REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
7174 | the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
7175 | of the face font sort order. | |
7176 | ||
79214ddf | 7177 | - Function: x-font-family-list |
a933dad1 DL |
7178 | |
7179 | Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
7180 | omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
7181 | (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
7182 | non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
7183 | ||
7184 | - Variable: font-list-limit | |
7185 | ||
7186 | Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
7187 | won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
7188 | matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
7189 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7190 | *** Setting face attributes. |
7191 | ||
7192 | For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
7193 | with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
7194 | implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
7195 | `face-attribute'. | |
7196 | ||
7197 | Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
7198 | symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
7199 | ||
7200 | The following attributes are recognized: | |
7201 | ||
7202 | `:family' | |
7203 | ||
7204 | VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
7205 | or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
7206 | and `?' are allowed. | |
7207 | ||
7208 | `:width' | |
7209 | ||
7210 | VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
7211 | It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
7212 | `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
7213 | `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
7214 | ||
7215 | `:height' | |
7216 | ||
787345ff MB |
7217 | VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
7218 | in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to | |
7219 | scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old | |
7220 | height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7221 | |
7222 | `:weight' | |
7223 | ||
7224 | VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
7225 | symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
7226 | `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
7227 | ||
7228 | `:slant' | |
7229 | ||
7230 | VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
7231 | symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
7232 | `reverse-oblique'. | |
7233 | ||
7234 | `:foreground', `:background' | |
7235 | ||
7236 | VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
7237 | ||
7238 | `:underline' | |
7239 | ||
7240 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
7241 | VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
7242 | a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
7243 | don't underline. | |
7244 | ||
7245 | `:overline' | |
7246 | ||
7247 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
7248 | VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
7249 | string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
7250 | overline. | |
7251 | ||
7252 | `:strike-through' | |
7253 | ||
7254 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
7255 | striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
7256 | face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
7257 | is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
7258 | ||
7259 | `:box' | |
7260 | ||
7261 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
7262 | around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
7263 | VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
7264 | of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
7265 | and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
7266 | VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
7267 | :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
7268 | the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
7269 | specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
7270 | defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
7271 | the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
7272 | color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
7273 | should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
7274 | like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
7275 | that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
7276 | the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
7277 | box. | |
7278 | ||
7279 | `:inverse-video' | |
7280 | ||
7281 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
7282 | inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
7283 | ||
7284 | `:stipple' | |
7285 | ||
7286 | If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
7287 | The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
7288 | searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
7289 | HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
7290 | is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
7291 | explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
7292 | ||
7293 | For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
7294 | and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
7295 | ||
7296 | `:font' | |
7297 | ||
7298 | Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
7299 | XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
7300 | is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
7301 | versions of Emacs. | |
7302 | ||
7303 | For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
7304 | be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
7305 | must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
7306 | ||
7307 | Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
7308 | `defface'. | |
7309 | ||
787345ff MB |
7310 | `:inherit' |
7311 | ||
7312 | VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list | |
7313 | of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face | |
7314 | like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. | |
7315 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7316 | *** Face attributes and X resources |
7317 | ||
7318 | The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
7319 | from X resources: | |
7320 | ||
7321 | Face attribute X resource class | |
7322 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
7323 | :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
7324 | :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
7325 | :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
7326 | :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
7327 | :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
7328 | foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
7329 | :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
7330 | :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
7331 | :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
7332 | :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
7333 | :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
7334 | :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
7335 | :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
79214ddf | 7336 | or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
a933dad1 DL |
7337 | Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
7338 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
7339 | :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
7340 | :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
7341 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
7342 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7343 | *** Text property `face'. |
7344 | ||
7345 | The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
7346 | specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
7347 | specification can be | |
7348 | ||
7349 | 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
7350 | ||
7351 | 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
7352 | KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
7353 | for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
7354 | for face attribute names. | |
7355 | ||
7356 | 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
7357 | (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
7358 | for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
7359 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7360 | ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. |
7361 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
7362 | The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
7363 | on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on | |
7364 | the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by | |
a933dad1 | 7365 | default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
acf3ecb7 | 7366 | `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
a933dad1 DL |
7367 | used to clear the mapping table. |
7368 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
7369 | ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
7370 | ||
7371 | The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', | |
7372 | and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose | |
7373 | type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style | |
7374 | color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame | |
7375 | display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the | |
7376 | old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and | |
7377 | `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for | |
7378 | compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs | |
7379 | should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to | |
7380 | modify their color-related behavior. | |
7381 | ||
7382 | The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for | |
7383 | any frame type. | |
7384 | ||
8a5719f0 EZ |
7385 | ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
7386 | ||
7387 | The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', | |
7388 | `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', | |
7389 | `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', | |
7390 | `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', | |
7391 | `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and | |
7392 | `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular | |
7393 | display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing | |
7394 | the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling | |
7395 | platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. | |
7396 | ||
27009a49 EZ |
7397 | The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular |
7398 | display can display image files. | |
7399 | ||
a933dad1 | 7400 | ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. |
a933dad1 | 7401 | |
463cac2d | 7402 | This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
3b51cca0 MB |
7403 | To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
7404 | the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the | |
7405 | `Inviolable' option. | |
a933dad1 | 7406 | |
d586cf1e | 7407 | The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the |
a933dad1 | 7408 | end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
d586cf1e | 7409 | Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'. |
a933dad1 | 7410 | |
463cac2d GM |
7411 | ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
7412 | ||
7413 | There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs | |
7414 | buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' | |
59927f88 | 7415 | property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
463cac2d | 7416 | |
9a9dfda8 | 7417 | Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
463cac2d | 7418 | forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
9a9dfda8 | 7419 | to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
463cac2d | 7420 | not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
fc7ac24f GM |
7421 | commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
7422 | boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
7423 | `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
7424 | functions. | |
463cac2d GM |
7425 | |
7426 | Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in | |
9a9dfda8 | 7427 | a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
463cac2d | 7428 | editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
a933dad1 | 7429 | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7430 | The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
7431 | ||
59927f88 | 7432 | - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7433 | |
7434 | Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. | |
59927f88 | 7435 | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7436 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
7437 | If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the | |
9b2a085d | 7438 | constrained position if that is different. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7439 | |
7440 | If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable | |
7441 | positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument | |
7442 | ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is | |
59927f88 | 7443 | constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7444 | as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
7445 | is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent | |
59927f88 MB |
7446 | fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
7447 | the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is | |
7448 | also considered to be `on the boundary'. | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7449 | |
7450 | If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining | |
7451 | NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned | |
7452 | unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like | |
7453 | C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries | |
7454 | only in the case where they can still move to the right line. | |
7455 | ||
59927f88 MB |
7456 | If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
7457 | a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. | |
7458 | ||
7459 | Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. | |
7460 | ||
7461 | - Function: delete-field &optional POS | |
9a9dfda8 | 7462 | |
59927f88 | 7463 | Delete the field surrounding POS. |
9a9dfda8 | 7464 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
59927f88 | 7465 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7466 | |
7467 | - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
7468 | ||
7469 | Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. | |
7470 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 MB |
7471 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
7472 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7473 | field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
7474 | ||
7475 | - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
7476 | ||
7477 | Return the end of the field surrounding POS. | |
7478 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 MB |
7479 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
7480 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7481 | then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
7482 | ||
7483 | - Function: field-string &optional POS | |
7484 | ||
7485 | Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. | |
7486 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 | 7487 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
7488 | |
7489 | - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS | |
7490 | ||
7491 | Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. | |
7492 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 | 7493 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 | 7494 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7495 | ** Image support. |
7496 | ||
7497 | Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
7498 | strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
7499 | (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
7500 | replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
7501 | ||
7502 | If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
7503 | `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
7504 | AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
7505 | window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
7506 | area. | |
7507 | ||
7508 | IMAGE is an image specification. | |
7509 | ||
7510 | *** Image specifications | |
7511 | ||
7512 | Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
7513 | is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
7514 | specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
35a5514b GM |
7515 | symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
7516 | described below are ignored. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7517 | |
7518 | The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
7519 | ||
7520 | `:ascent ASCENT' | |
7521 | ||
576da55d GM |
7522 | ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
7523 | If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
5d94f558 | 7524 | to use for its ascent. |
576da55d GM |
7525 | |
7526 | If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
7527 | image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
7528 | ||
5d94f558 | 7529 | If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
04545643 GM |
7530 | centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
7531 | of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and | |
7532 | overlays that apply to the image. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7533 | |
7534 | `:margin MARGIN' | |
7535 | ||
b30623be GM |
7536 | MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
7537 | as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the | |
7538 | horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7539 | |
7540 | `:relief RELIEF' | |
7541 | ||
7542 | RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
7543 | around an image. | |
7544 | ||
f864120f | 7545 | `:conversion ALGO' |
a933dad1 | 7546 | |
47e351a3 GM |
7547 | Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
7548 | ||
7549 | ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' | |
7550 | edge-detection algorithm to the image. | |
7551 | ||
7552 | ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means | |
7553 | apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a | |
7554 | nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at | |
7555 | position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels | |
7556 | around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the | |
7557 | neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the | |
7558 | transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at | |
7559 | x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown | |
7560 | below. | |
7561 | ||
7562 | (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 | |
7563 | x-1/y x/y x+1/y | |
7564 | x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) | |
7565 | ||
7566 | The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color | |
7567 | resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, | |
7568 | multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum | |
7569 | of the factors' absolute values. | |
7570 | ||
327652be | 7571 | Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
a933dad1 | 7572 | |
47e351a3 GM |
7573 | (1 0 0 |
7574 | 0 0 0 | |
7575 | 9 9 -1) | |
7576 | ||
7577 | Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of | |
7578 | ||
7579 | ( 2 -1 0 | |
7580 | -1 0 1 | |
7581 | 0 1 -2) | |
7582 | ||
ba9eeda1 GM |
7583 | ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
7584 | ``disabled''. | |
7585 | ||
47e351a3 GM |
7586 | `:mask MASK' |
7587 | ||
7588 | If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for | |
7589 | the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the | |
7590 | image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the | |
7591 | background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the | |
8a33023e | 7592 | image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
47e351a3 GM |
7593 | the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
7594 | GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the | |
7595 | image. | |
a933dad1 | 7596 | |
47e351a3 GM |
7597 | If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images |
7598 | in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying | |
7599 | `:mask nil'. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7600 | |
7601 | `:file FILE' | |
7602 | ||
7603 | Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
7604 | search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
7605 | building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
7606 | may be present in the image specification. | |
7607 | ||
518df5c4 GM |
7608 | `:data DATA' |
7609 | ||
7610 | Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet | |
7611 | supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be | |
7612 | present in an image specification, but not both. All image types | |
7613 | support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. | |
7614 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7615 | *** Supported image types |
7616 | ||
b246b1f6 | 7617 | **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
a933dad1 DL |
7618 | |
7619 | XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
0e467b97 | 7620 | properties supported are: |
a933dad1 DL |
7621 | |
7622 | `:foreground FG' | |
7623 | ||
94736c7c | 7624 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
0e467b97 | 7625 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color. |
a933dad1 | 7626 | |
46c5af7f | 7627 | `:background BG' |
a933dad1 | 7628 | |
0e467b97 | 7629 | BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil |
94736c7c | 7630 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
a933dad1 DL |
7631 | |
7632 | XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
7633 | case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
7634 | instead of a `:file' property. | |
7635 | ||
7636 | `:width WIDTH' | |
7637 | ||
7638 | WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
7639 | ||
7640 | `:height HEIGHT' | |
7641 | ||
7642 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
7643 | ||
7644 | `:data DATA' | |
7645 | ||
7646 | DATA must be either | |
7647 | ||
7648 | 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
7649 | have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
7650 | ||
7651 | 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
7652 | ||
7653 | 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
7654 | bitmap. | |
7655 | ||
c76e04a8 GM |
7656 | 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
7657 | height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
7658 | in the file. | |
7659 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7660 | **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
7661 | ||
7662 | XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
7663 | `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
7664 | found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
7665 | `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
7666 | ||
7667 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
7668 | ||
7669 | `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
7670 | ||
7671 | SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
7672 | name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
7673 | name. | |
7674 | ||
7675 | XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
7676 | add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
7677 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7678 | The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
7679 | to display compressed images. | |
7680 | ||
7681 | **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
7682 | ||
7683 | PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
2b8e9c91 | 7684 | mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
0e467b97 | 7685 | mono images are: |
2b8e9c91 GM |
7686 | |
7687 | `:foreground FG' | |
7688 | ||
94736c7c | 7689 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
0e467b97 | 7690 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color. |
2b8e9c91 GM |
7691 | |
7692 | `:background FG' | |
7693 | ||
0e467b97 | 7694 | BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil |
94736c7c | 7695 | meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
a933dad1 DL |
7696 | |
7697 | **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
7698 | ||
7699 | Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
0e467b97 JB |
7700 | package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
7701 | properties defined. | |
3bd37feb | 7702 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7703 | **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
7704 | ||
7705 | Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
7706 | package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
7707 | properties defined. | |
7708 | ||
7709 | **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
7710 | ||
7711 | Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
7712 | `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
7713 | ||
7714 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
7715 | ||
7716 | `:index INDEX' | |
7717 | ||
7718 | INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
6b61353c KH |
7719 | multi-image GIF file. If INDEX is too large, the image displays |
7720 | as a hollow box. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7721 | |
7722 | This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
7723 | For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
7724 | at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
7725 | every 0.1 seconds. | |
7726 | ||
7727 | (defun show-anim (file max) | |
7728 | "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
7729 | (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
7730 | ||
7731 | (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
7732 | (when (= idx max) | |
7733 | (setq idx 0)) | |
518df5c4 | 7734 | (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
a933dad1 DL |
7735 | (save-excursion |
7736 | (set-buffer buffer) | |
7737 | (goto-char (point-min)) | |
7738 | (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
7739 | (insert-image img "x")) | |
7740 | (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
7741 | ||
7742 | **** PNG, image type `png' | |
7743 | ||
7744 | Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
7745 | package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
7746 | properties defined. | |
7747 | ||
7748 | **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
7749 | ||
7750 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
7751 | ||
7752 | `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
7753 | ||
7754 | WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
b246b1f6 | 7755 | integer. This is a required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
7756 | |
7757 | `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
7758 | ||
7759 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
b246b1f6 | 7760 | must be a integer. This is an required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
7761 | |
7762 | `:bounding-box BOX' | |
7763 | ||
7764 | BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
7765 | the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
7766 | files. This is an required property. | |
7767 | ||
7768 | Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
7769 | lisp/gs.el. | |
7770 | ||
7771 | *** Lisp interface. | |
7772 | ||
79214ddf FP |
7773 | The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
7774 | which are supported in the current configuration. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7775 | |
7776 | Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
7777 | they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
7778 | The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
084cec2f GM |
7779 | manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
7780 | images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7781 | |
7782 | *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
7783 | ||
7784 | The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
7785 | creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
7786 | can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
7787 | define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
7788 | `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
7789 | buffer. | |
7790 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7791 | ** Display margins. |
7792 | ||
7793 | Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
7794 | and images. | |
7795 | ||
7796 | To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
7797 | `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
7798 | `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
7799 | obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
7800 | `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
7801 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
7802 | of the display margins. | |
7803 | ||
7804 | You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
7805 | containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
7806 | one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
7807 | string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
7808 | in this file). | |
7809 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7810 | ** Help display |
7811 | ||
7812 | Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
7813 | moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
7814 | `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
7815 | that have a `help-echo' property. | |
7816 | ||
9662da0b | 7817 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
85a8aca9 | 7818 | is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
c20aeb83 GM |
7819 | the window in which the help was found. |
7820 | ||
7821 | If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the | |
7822 | `help-echo' text property was found. | |
7823 | ||
7824 | If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and | |
7825 | POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. | |
7826 | ||
7827 | If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with | |
5ed8d5af | 7828 | the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
c20aeb83 | 7829 | mouse. |
d5aa31d8 | 7830 | |
9662da0b GM |
7831 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a |
7832 | string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. | |
7833 | ||
7834 | For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to | |
7835 | determine the help to display. If their definition contains a | |
7836 | property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. | |
7837 | For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is | |
7838 | used as help string. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7839 | |
7840 | The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
f0298744 DL |
7841 | the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
7842 | causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
a933dad1 | 7843 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7844 | ** Vertical fractional scrolling. |
7845 | ||
7846 | The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
7847 | This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
7848 | ||
7849 | The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
7850 | scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
7851 | The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
7852 | scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
7853 | used. | |
7854 | ||
79214ddf FP |
7855 | (global-set-key [A-down] |
7856 | #'(lambda () | |
a933dad1 | 7857 | (interactive) |
79214ddf | 7858 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 | 7859 | (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
79214ddf | 7860 | (global-set-key [A-up] |
a933dad1 DL |
7861 | #'(lambda () |
7862 | (interactive) | |
79214ddf | 7863 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 DL |
7864 | (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
7865 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7866 | ** New hook `fontification-functions'. |
7867 | ||
7868 | Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
7869 | when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
7870 | variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
7871 | is called with one argument, POS. | |
7872 | ||
7873 | At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
7874 | characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
7875 | as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
7876 | property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
7877 | `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
7878 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7879 | ** Tool bar support. |
7880 | ||
7881 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
7882 | parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
7883 | controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
7884 | suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
7885 | `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
7886 | automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
7887 | ||
7888 | *** Tool bar item definitions | |
7889 | ||
7890 | Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
7891 | `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
7892 | where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
79214ddf | 7893 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7894 | CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
7895 | evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
7896 | the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
7897 | property (see below). | |
79214ddf | 7898 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7899 | BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
7900 | binding are currently ignored. | |
7901 | ||
7902 | The following properties are recognized: | |
7903 | ||
7904 | `:enable FORM'. | |
79214ddf | 7905 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7906 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
7907 | or disabled. | |
79214ddf | 7908 | |
a933dad1 | 7909 | `:visible FORM' |
79214ddf | 7910 | |
a933dad1 | 7911 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
79214ddf | 7912 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7913 | `:filter FUNCTION' |
7914 | ||
7915 | FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
7916 | FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
7917 | used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
79214ddf | 7918 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7919 | `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
7920 | ||
7921 | TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
7922 | and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
79214ddf | 7923 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7924 | `:image IMAGES' |
7925 | ||
7926 | IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
7927 | image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
7928 | meaning of each of the four elements: | |
7929 | ||
7930 | Index Use when item is | |
7931 | ---------------------------------------- | |
7932 | 0 enabled and selected | |
7933 | 1 enabled and deselected | |
7934 | 2 disabled and selected | |
7935 | 3 disabled and deselected | |
79214ddf | 7936 | |
4ba7246d GM |
7937 | If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
7938 | algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. | |
7939 | ||
a933dad1 | 7940 | `:help HELP-STRING'. |
79214ddf | 7941 | |
a933dad1 DL |
7942 | Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
7943 | is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
7944 | ||
dab96841 | 7945 | The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
d1e68bce DL |
7946 | toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
7947 | to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the | |
7948 | menu bar. | |
dab96841 | 7949 | |
8628686a DL |
7950 | The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
7951 | dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set | |
7952 | buffer-locally to override the global map. | |
7953 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7954 | *** Tool-bar-related variables. |
7955 | ||
7956 | If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
7957 | resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
7958 | than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
7959 | ||
79214ddf | 7960 | If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
a933dad1 DL |
7961 | raised when the mouse moves over them. |
7962 | ||
7963 | You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
7964 | `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
b30623be GM |
7965 | pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
7966 | vertical margins . Default is 1. | |
a933dad1 DL |
7967 | |
7968 | You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
7969 | `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
7970 | ||
7971 | *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
7972 | ||
7973 | You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
79214ddf | 7974 | a tool bar item. If |
a933dad1 DL |
7975 | |
7976 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
7977 | '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
7978 | :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
7979 | ||
7980 | is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
7981 | ||
7982 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
7983 | ||
7984 | makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
7985 | item. | |
7986 | ||
7987 | ** Mode line changes. | |
7988 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
7989 | *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
7990 | ||
7991 | The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
7992 | that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
7993 | a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
7994 | ||
7995 | 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
7996 | a `local-map' text property. | |
7997 | ||
7998 | 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
7999 | that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
8000 | ||
8001 | 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
8002 | is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
8003 | `local-map' property. | |
8004 | ||
8005 | The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
8006 | properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
8007 | example. | |
8008 | ||
54522c9f GM |
8009 | *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
8010 | evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. | |
8011 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8012 | *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local |
8013 | variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
8014 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8015 | *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. |
8016 | ||
8017 | This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
8018 | `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
8019 | completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
8020 | `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
8021 | line. | |
8022 | ||
8023 | The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
8024 | `header-line'. | |
8025 | ||
8026 | The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
8027 | position in the header-line. | |
8028 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8029 | ** Text property `display' |
8030 | ||
623a0aae GM |
8031 | The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
8032 | replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is | |
8033 | also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of | |
8034 | the `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
a933dad1 DL |
8035 | below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
8036 | ||
623a0aae GM |
8037 | *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
8038 | ||
8039 | To replace the text having the `display' property with some other | |
8040 | text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. | |
8041 | ||
8042 | If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left | |
8043 | marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in | |
8044 | the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING | |
8045 | is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
8046 | simpler form STRING as property value. | |
8047 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8048 | *** Variable width and height spaces |
8049 | ||
8050 | To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
8051 | specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
8052 | `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
8053 | area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
8054 | marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
8055 | displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
8056 | simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
8057 | ||
8058 | The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
8059 | PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
8060 | properties described below. | |
8061 | ||
8062 | The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
8063 | characters having the `display' property. | |
8064 | ||
8065 | - :width WIDTH | |
8066 | ||
8067 | Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
8068 | character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
8069 | ||
8070 | - :relative-width FACTOR | |
8071 | ||
8072 | Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
8073 | first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
8074 | same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
8075 | width of that character by FACTOR. | |
8076 | ||
8077 | - :align-to HPOS | |
8078 | ||
8079 | Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
8080 | value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
8081 | ||
8082 | Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
8083 | ||
8084 | - :height HEIGHT | |
8085 | ||
8086 | Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
8087 | normal line height. | |
8088 | ||
8089 | - :relative-height FACTOR | |
8090 | ||
8091 | The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
8092 | of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
8093 | ||
8094 | - :ascent ASCENT | |
8095 | ||
8096 | Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
8097 | used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
8098 | baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
8099 | equal to 100. | |
8100 | ||
8101 | You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
8102 | ||
8103 | *** Images | |
8104 | ||
8105 | A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
8106 | . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
8107 | in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
8108 | their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
8109 | the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
8110 | `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
8111 | area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
8112 | the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
8113 | as display specification. | |
8114 | ||
8115 | *** Other display properties | |
8116 | ||
c9e73000 | 8117 | - (space-width FACTOR) |
a933dad1 DL |
8118 | |
8119 | Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
8120 | should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
8121 | integer or float. | |
8122 | ||
c9e73000 | 8123 | - (height HEIGHT) |
a933dad1 DL |
8124 | |
8125 | Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
8126 | ||
8127 | If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
8128 | means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
8129 | the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
8130 | ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
8131 | a font is available counts as a step. | |
8132 | ||
8133 | If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
8134 | as tall as the frame's default font. | |
8135 | ||
8136 | If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
8137 | height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
8138 | ||
8139 | Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
8140 | `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
8141 | ||
c9e73000 | 8142 | - (raise FACTOR) |
a933dad1 DL |
8143 | |
8144 | FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
8145 | font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
8146 | raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
8147 | amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
c9e73000 | 8148 | `height' subproperty. |
a933dad1 DL |
8149 | |
8150 | *** Conditional display properties | |
8151 | ||
8152 | All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
6c6caea2 GM |
8153 | has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies |
8154 | only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the | |
8155 | evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the | |
8156 | conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are | |
8157 | bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where | |
8158 | the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be | |
8159 | different when object is a string. | |
a933dad1 DL |
8160 | |
8161 | The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
6c6caea2 | 8162 | `(when t . SPEC)'. |
a933dad1 | 8163 | |
a933dad1 DL |
8164 | ** New menu separator types. |
8165 | ||
8166 | Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
8167 | item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
8168 | treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
8169 | to specify other menu separator types. | |
8170 | ||
8171 | - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
8172 | ||
8173 | No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
8174 | separator occurs. | |
8175 | ||
8176 | - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
8177 | ||
8178 | A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
8179 | ||
8180 | - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
8181 | ||
8182 | A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
8183 | ||
8184 | - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
8185 | ||
8186 | A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
8187 | ||
8188 | - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
8189 | ||
8190 | A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
8191 | ||
8192 | - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
8193 | ||
f3780fe4 | 8194 | A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
a933dad1 DL |
8195 | displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
8196 | ||
8197 | - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
8198 | ||
8199 | A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
8200 | ||
8201 | - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
8202 | ||
8203 | A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
8204 | ||
8205 | - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
8206 | ||
8207 | A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
8208 | ||
8209 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
8210 | ||
8211 | Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
8212 | ||
8213 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
8214 | ||
8215 | Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
8216 | ||
8217 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
8218 | ||
8219 | Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
8220 | ||
8221 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
8222 | ||
8223 | Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
8224 | ||
8225 | Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
8226 | the corresponding single-line separators. | |
8227 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8228 | ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. |
8229 | ||
8230 | The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
8231 | `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
8232 | Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
8233 | that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
8234 | default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
8235 | default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
8236 | default foreground is black. | |
8237 | ||
8238 | The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
8239 | (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
8240 | `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
8241 | ||
8242 | Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
8243 | settings for scroll bar colors. | |
8244 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8245 | ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent |
8246 | display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
8247 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8248 | ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it |
8249 | starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
8250 | on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
8251 | line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
8252 | the original window start. | |
8253 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8254 | ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions |
8255 | `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
8256 | now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
8257 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
8258 | ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. |
8259 | ||
8260 | A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
8261 | `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
8262 | windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
8263 | other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
8264 | ||
8265 | The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
8266 | fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
8267 | ||
8268 | (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
8269 | ||
8270 | A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
8271 | fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
8272 | window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
8273 | change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
8274 | temporarily to nil, for example | |
8275 | ||
8276 | (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
8277 | (enlarge-window 10)) | |
8278 | ||
79214ddf | 8279 | Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
a933dad1 | 8280 | or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
e411ce4b EZ |
8281 | |
8282 | ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS | |
8283 | terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape | |
8284 | to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter | |
8285 | overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is | |
8286 | horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't | |
8287 | support a vertical-bar cursor). | |
76299050 | 8288 | |
3787e12e | 8289 | |
05197f40 | 8290 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8291 | * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
8292 | ||
8293 | ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard | |
8294 | input. | |
8295 | ||
8296 | ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. | |
8297 | ||
8298 | ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. | |
8299 | ||
8300 | ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not | |
8301 | only for character input, but also in incremental search. The | |
8302 | exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets | |
8303 | (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence | |
8304 | (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. | |
8305 | ||
8306 | ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has | |
8307 | been added. | |
8308 | ||
05197f40 | 8309 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8310 | * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
8311 | ||
8312 | ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. | |
8313 | ||
0cb146bf | 8314 | |
05197f40 | 8315 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8316 | * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
8317 | ||
8318 | ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
8319 | M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
05197f40 | 8320 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8321 | * Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
8322 | ||
8323 | ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
8324 | ||
8325 | You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
8326 | Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
8327 | `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
8328 | ||
8329 | If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
8330 | is the one that is used. | |
8331 | ||
8332 | ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
8333 | the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
8334 | Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
8335 | separate from the command's regular output. | |
8336 | Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
8337 | says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
8338 | In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
8339 | the buffer name. | |
8340 | ||
8341 | When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
8342 | output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
8343 | it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
8344 | cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
8345 | ||
8346 | ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
8347 | the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
8348 | is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
8349 | created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
8350 | ||
8351 | ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
8352 | example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
8353 | match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
8354 | quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
8355 | ||
8356 | ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
8357 | now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
8358 | if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
8359 | they never ignore case. | |
8360 | ||
8361 | ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
8362 | under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
8363 | applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
8364 | of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
8365 | just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
8366 | convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
8367 | part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
8368 | ||
8369 | If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
8370 | the same format that was used in the file before. | |
8371 | ||
8372 | You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
8373 | `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
8374 | ||
8375 | ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
8376 | renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
8377 | This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
8378 | ||
8379 | ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
8380 | The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
8381 | buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
8382 | your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
8383 | is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
8384 | end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
8385 | Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
8386 | ||
8387 | The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
8388 | eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
8389 | control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
8390 | format. You can now customize these variables. | |
8391 | ||
8392 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
8393 | filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
8394 | filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
8395 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
8396 | ||
8397 | ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
8398 | in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
8399 | windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
8400 | ||
8401 | ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
8402 | dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
8403 | doesn't have any effect. | |
8404 | ||
8405 | ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
8406 | not one per buffer. | |
8407 | ||
8408 | ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
8409 | use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
8410 | (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
8411 | ||
8412 | ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
8413 | To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
8414 | `auto-show-mode' command. | |
8415 | ||
8416 | ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
8417 | avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
8418 | versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
8419 | choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
8420 | occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
8421 | ||
8422 | ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
8423 | cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
8424 | ||
8425 | ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
8426 | character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
8427 | feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
8428 | ||
8429 | ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
8430 | the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
8431 | interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
8432 | and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
8433 | ||
8434 | ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
8435 | ||
8436 | The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
8437 | that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
8438 | one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
8439 | codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
8440 | set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
8441 | ||
8442 | Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
8443 | from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
8444 | ||
8445 | IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
8446 | equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
8447 | a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
8448 | `?' on other systems. | |
8449 | ||
8450 | IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
8451 | feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
8452 | Unix. | |
8453 | ||
8454 | Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
8455 | current codepage when it starts. | |
8456 | ||
8457 | ** Mail changes | |
8458 | ||
8459 | *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if | |
8460 | `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
8461 | appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
8462 | non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
8463 | MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
8464 | headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
8465 | latin-1: | |
8466 | ||
8467 | MIME-version: 1.0 | |
8468 | Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
8469 | Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
8470 | ||
8471 | *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
8472 | default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
8473 | default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
8474 | sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
8475 | buffer-file-coding-system. | |
8476 | ||
8477 | You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
8478 | sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
8479 | mail. | |
8480 | ||
8481 | *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
8482 | if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
8483 | Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
8484 | list of possible coding systems. | |
8485 | ||
8486 | ** CC Mode changes | |
8487 | ||
8488 | *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
8489 | modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
8490 | longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
8491 | docstring for details. | |
8492 | ||
8493 | *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
8494 | symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
8495 | found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
8496 | prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
8497 | lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
8498 | ||
8499 | *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
8500 | "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
8501 | ||
8502 | *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
8503 | "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
8504 | ||
8505 | *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
8506 | from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
8507 | symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
8508 | c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
8509 | anonymous classes. | |
8510 | ||
8511 | *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
8512 | syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
8513 | ||
8514 | *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
8515 | inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
8516 | support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
8517 | function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
8518 | ||
8519 | *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
8520 | (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
8521 | brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
8522 | c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
8523 | (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
8524 | ||
8525 | *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
8526 | ||
8527 | *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
8528 | ||
8529 | *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
8530 | for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
8531 | ||
8532 | *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
8533 | ||
8534 | *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
8535 | associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
8536 | This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
8537 | circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
8538 | class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
8539 | ||
8540 | ** Gnus changes. | |
8541 | ||
8542 | *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
8543 | added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
8544 | Gnus manual for the full story. | |
8545 | ||
8546 | *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
8547 | before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
8548 | group, which is created automatically. | |
8549 | ||
8550 | *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
8551 | values. | |
8552 | ||
8553 | *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
8554 | ||
8555 | *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
8556 | outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
8557 | ||
8558 | *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
8559 | `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
8560 | ||
8561 | *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
8562 | ||
8563 | *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
8564 | re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
8565 | ||
8566 | *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
8567 | ||
8568 | *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
8569 | Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
8570 | ||
8571 | *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
8572 | `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
8573 | ||
8574 | *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
8575 | control over simplification. | |
8576 | ||
8577 | *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
8578 | ||
8579 | *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
8580 | limit. | |
8581 | ||
8582 | *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
8583 | ||
8584 | *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
8585 | ||
8586 | *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | |
8587 | If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | |
8588 | rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
8589 | ||
8a33023e | 8590 | *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
3787e12e GM |
8591 | `a' forces normal posting method. |
8592 | ||
8593 | *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
8594 | -- `W d'. | |
8595 | ||
8596 | *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
8597 | to a non-nil value. | |
8598 | ||
8599 | *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
8600 | where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
8601 | ||
8602 | *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
8603 | has been added. | |
8604 | ||
8605 | *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
8606 | ||
8607 | *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
8608 | ||
8609 | *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
8610 | `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
8611 | ||
8612 | *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
8613 | `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
8614 | ||
8615 | *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
8616 | ||
8617 | *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
8618 | been added. | |
8619 | ||
8620 | *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
8621 | `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
8622 | ||
8623 | *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
8624 | updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
8625 | ||
8626 | *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
8627 | ||
8628 | *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
8629 | ||
8630 | *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
8631 | ||
8632 | ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
8633 | ||
8634 | *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
8635 | options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
8636 | nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
8637 | ||
8638 | *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
8639 | TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
8640 | of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
8641 | TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
8642 | can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
8643 | ||
8644 | *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
8645 | All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
8646 | but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
8647 | the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
8648 | ||
8649 | *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
8650 | the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
8651 | buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
8652 | mismatch. | |
8653 | ||
8654 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
8655 | ||
8656 | *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
8657 | file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
8658 | ||
8659 | *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
8660 | lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
8661 | characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
8662 | removed from the label. | |
8663 | ||
8664 | *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
8665 | a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
8666 | ||
8667 | *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
8668 | customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
8669 | ||
8670 | *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
8671 | `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
8672 | expressions. | |
8673 | ||
8674 | *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
8675 | ||
8676 | ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
8677 | ||
8678 | *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
8679 | SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
8680 | ||
8681 | *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
8682 | editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
8683 | SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
8684 | ||
8685 | *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
8686 | changes with a special face. | |
8687 | ||
8688 | *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
8689 | this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
8690 | Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
05197f40 | 8691 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8692 | * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
8693 | ||
8694 | ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
8695 | This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
8696 | conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
8697 | and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
8698 | check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
8699 | ||
8700 | The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
8701 | Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
8702 | distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
8703 | ||
8704 | ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
8705 | MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
8706 | controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
8707 | directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
8708 | Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
8709 | on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
8710 | string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
8711 | program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
8712 | printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
8713 | ||
8714 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
8715 | output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
8716 | available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
8717 | input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
8718 | temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
8719 | program. | |
8720 | ||
8721 | An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
8722 | and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
8723 | programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
8724 | automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
8725 | as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
8726 | ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
8727 | ||
8728 | ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
8729 | a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
8730 | MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
8731 | was not documented clearly before. | |
8732 | ||
8733 | ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
8734 | This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
05197f40 | 8735 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8736 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
8737 | ||
8738 | ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
8739 | return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
8740 | They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
8741 | meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
8742 | ||
8743 | ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
8744 | WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
8745 | and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
8746 | ||
8747 | ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
8748 | ||
8749 | *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
8750 | It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
8751 | ||
8752 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
8753 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
8754 | integers. | |
8755 | ||
8756 | ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
8757 | files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
8758 | arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
8759 | file names and attributes are returned. | |
8760 | ||
8761 | ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
8762 | sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
8a33023e | 8763 | accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
3787e12e GM |
8764 | It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
8765 | returns the result. | |
8766 | ||
8767 | ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
8768 | to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
8769 | ||
8770 | ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
8771 | ||
8772 | The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
8773 | into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
8774 | performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
8775 | optionally. | |
8776 | ||
8777 | Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
8778 | job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
8779 | ||
8780 | ** | |
8781 | The new function process-running-child-p | |
8782 | will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
8783 | terminal to its own child process. | |
8784 | ||
8785 | ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
8786 | when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
8787 | to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
8788 | itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
8789 | ||
8790 | ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
8791 | be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
8792 | ||
4a389f53 | 8793 | ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. |
3787e12e GM |
8794 | :included is an alias for :visible. |
8795 | ||
8796 | easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
8797 | easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
8798 | to move or copy menu entries. | |
8799 | ||
8800 | ** Multibyte editing changes | |
8801 | ||
8802 | *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
8803 | an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
8804 | make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
8805 | work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
8806 | char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
8807 | (setq char (sref str idx) | |
8808 | idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
8809 | The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
8810 | ||
8811 | If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
8812 | (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
8813 | (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
8814 | ||
8815 | *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
8816 | region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
8817 | deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
8818 | ||
8a33023e | 8819 | Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
3787e12e GM |
8820 | |
8821 | This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
8822 | across the boundary. | |
8823 | ||
8824 | *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
8825 | `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
8826 | o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
8827 | contains 8-bit characters. | |
8828 | o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
8829 | contains invalid characters. | |
8830 | ||
8831 | *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
8832 | text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
8833 | preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
8834 | text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
8835 | way. | |
8836 | ||
8837 | *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
8838 | If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
8839 | end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
8840 | prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
8841 | ||
8842 | *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
8843 | compose Thai characters in a string. | |
8844 | ||
8845 | ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
8846 | argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
8847 | for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
8848 | menus should always use the third argument. | |
8849 | ||
8850 | ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
8851 | read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
8852 | arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
8853 | input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
8854 | ||
8855 | ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
8856 | of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
8857 | programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
8858 | inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
8859 | ||
8860 | ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
8861 | the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
8862 | returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
8863 | echo area contents. | |
8864 | ||
8865 | (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
8866 | ||
8867 | ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
8868 | NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
8869 | requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
8870 | ||
8871 | ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
8872 | foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
8873 | means to clear out that attribute. | |
8874 | ||
8875 | ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
8876 | gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
8877 | ||
8878 | ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
8879 | read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
8880 | unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
8881 | end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
8882 | ||
8883 | ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
8884 | the gap of the current buffer. | |
8885 | ||
8886 | ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
8887 | to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
8888 | current buffer. | |
8889 | ||
8890 | ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
8891 | facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
8892 | These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
8893 | it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
05197f40 | 8894 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8895 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
8896 | ||
8897 | ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
8898 | the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
8899 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
8900 | directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
8901 | subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
8902 | ||
8903 | Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
8904 | names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
8905 | Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
8906 | which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
8907 | these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
8908 | ||
8909 | Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
8910 | starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
8911 | time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
8912 | ||
8913 | This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
8914 | Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
8915 | to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
8916 | subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
8917 | `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
8918 | results. | |
8919 | ||
8920 | ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
8921 | GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
8922 | that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
8923 | fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
05197f40 | 8924 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
8925 | * Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
8926 | ||
8927 | ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
8928 | including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
8929 | it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
8930 | perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
8931 | ||
8932 | ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
8933 | specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
8934 | region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
8935 | further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
8936 | command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
8937 | within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
8938 | are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
8939 | region. | |
8940 | ||
8941 | In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
8942 | selective undo. | |
8943 | ||
8944 | ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
8945 | unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
8946 | buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
8947 | effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
8948 | Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
8949 | ||
8950 | The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
8951 | though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
8952 | -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
8953 | load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
8954 | ||
8955 | ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
8956 | no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
8957 | enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
8958 | something that most users not do. | |
8959 | ||
8960 | ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
8961 | operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
8962 | The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
8963 | applications. | |
8964 | ||
8965 | C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
8966 | pasting operations. | |
8967 | ||
8968 | ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
8969 | setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
8970 | like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
8971 | printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
8972 | `ps-printer-name'. | |
8973 | ||
8974 | ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
8975 | minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
8976 | any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
8977 | except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
8978 | incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
8979 | hits a new word. | |
8980 | ||
8981 | Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
8982 | Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
8983 | to be confused by TeX commands. | |
8984 | ||
8985 | You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
8986 | correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
8987 | clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
8988 | of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
8989 | ||
8990 | Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
8991 | the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
8992 | corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
8993 | alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
8994 | flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
8995 | ||
8996 | Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
8997 | flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
8998 | ||
8999 | ** Changes in input method usage. | |
9000 | ||
9001 | Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
9002 | the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
9003 | respectively. | |
9004 | ||
9005 | You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
9006 | ||
9007 | If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
9008 | of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
9009 | ||
9010 | The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
9011 | that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
9012 | ||
9013 | If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
9014 | ||
9015 | If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
9016 | ||
9017 | If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
9018 | when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
9019 | ||
9020 | If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
9021 | given in the following case: | |
9022 | o When you are using a complex input method. | |
9023 | o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
9024 | ||
9025 | If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
9026 | input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
9027 | and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
9028 | setting it to t is helpful. | |
9029 | ||
9030 | The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
9031 | ||
9032 | In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
9033 | keys: | |
9034 | Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
9035 | C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
9036 | F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
9037 | These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
9038 | environment. | |
9039 | ||
9040 | ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
9041 | names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
9042 | minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
9043 | get | |
9044 | ||
9045 | /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
9046 | ||
9047 | which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
9048 | ||
9049 | Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
9050 | Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
9051 | ||
9052 | ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
9053 | at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
9054 | its owner and group. | |
9055 | ||
9056 | ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
9057 | Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
9058 | ||
9059 | ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
9060 | contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
9061 | ||
9062 | ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
9063 | which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
9064 | in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
9065 | by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
9066 | ||
9067 | ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
9068 | increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
9069 | C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
9070 | for writing keyboard macros. | |
9071 | ||
9072 | ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
9073 | files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
9074 | frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
9075 | the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
9076 | additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
9077 | info. | |
9078 | ||
9079 | ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
9080 | ||
9081 | ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
9082 | query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
9083 | contents only. | |
9084 | ||
9085 | ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
9086 | confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
9087 | the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
9088 | says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
9089 | ||
9090 | ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
9091 | non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
9092 | literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
9093 | ||
9094 | ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
9095 | now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
9096 | Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
9097 | inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
9098 | ||
9099 | ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
9100 | failure if the command produces no output. | |
9101 | ||
9102 | ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
9103 | manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
9104 | the mouse. | |
9105 | ||
9106 | ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
9107 | mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
9108 | function and variable names. | |
9109 | ||
9110 | ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
9111 | reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
9112 | file-coding-system-alist. | |
9113 | ||
9114 | ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
9115 | t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
9116 | converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
9117 | the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
9118 | according to the current fontset. | |
9119 | ||
9120 | ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
9121 | ||
9122 | The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
9123 | that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
9124 | nonascii-insert-offset. | |
9125 | ||
9126 | For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
9127 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
9128 | nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
9129 | characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
9130 | ||
9131 | ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
9132 | an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
9133 | ||
9134 | ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
9135 | letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
9136 | ||
9137 | ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
9138 | are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
9139 | command keys. | |
9140 | ||
9141 | ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
9142 | user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
9143 | ||
9144 | Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
9145 | user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
9146 | all variables that have documentation. | |
9147 | ||
9148 | ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
9149 | shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
9150 | that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
9151 | minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
9152 | it should show; the default is 20. | |
9153 | ||
9154 | Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
9155 | the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
9156 | of your input. | |
9157 | ||
9158 | ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
9159 | all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
9160 | recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
9161 | argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
9162 | the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
9163 | Newly added options are included as well. | |
9164 | ||
9165 | If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
9166 | then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
9167 | for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
9168 | ||
9169 | This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
9170 | Customize menu. | |
9171 | ||
9172 | ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
9173 | the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
9174 | ||
9175 | ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
9176 | buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
9177 | invoked. | |
9178 | ||
9179 | ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
9180 | that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
9181 | The default is 1. | |
9182 | ||
9183 | ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
9184 | syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
9185 | new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
9186 | (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
9187 | sensibly. | |
9188 | ||
9189 | ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
9190 | ||
9191 | ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
9192 | value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
9193 | two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
9194 | ||
9195 | ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
9196 | reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
9197 | for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
9198 | every night. | |
9199 | ||
9200 | ** Desktop changes | |
9201 | ||
9202 | *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
9203 | the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
9204 | ||
9205 | *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored | |
9206 | and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
9207 | ||
9208 | ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
9209 | read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
9210 | ||
9211 | ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
9212 | doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
9213 | be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
9214 | outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
9215 | the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
9216 | made invisible again. | |
9217 | ||
9218 | ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
9219 | ||
9220 | *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
9221 | the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
9222 | changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
9223 | toggle. | |
9224 | ||
9225 | *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
9226 | now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
9227 | summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
9228 | the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
9229 | rmail-default-body-file. | |
9230 | ||
9231 | *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
9232 | longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
9233 | handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
9234 | ||
9235 | *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
9236 | it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
9237 | is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
9238 | ||
9239 | *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
9240 | outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
9241 | handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
9242 | putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
9243 | transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
9244 | especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
9245 | ||
9246 | feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
9247 | feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
9248 | provided by feedmail are: | |
9249 | ||
9250 | **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
9251 | stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
9252 | there is also a queue for draft messages | |
9253 | ||
9254 | **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
9255 | be prompted for confirmation | |
9256 | ||
9257 | **** does smart filling of address headers | |
9258 | ||
9259 | **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
9260 | the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
9261 | can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
9262 | ||
9263 | **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
9264 | the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
9265 | /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
9266 | function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
9267 | ||
9268 | ** Dired changes | |
9269 | ||
9270 | *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
9271 | files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
9272 | ||
9273 | *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
9274 | run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
9275 | ||
9276 | *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
9277 | files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
9278 | for a specified regexp. | |
9279 | ||
9280 | ** VC Changes | |
9281 | ||
9282 | *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
9283 | conveniently. | |
9284 | ||
9285 | *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
9286 | faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
9287 | Dired. | |
9288 | ||
9289 | VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
9290 | directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
9291 | listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
9292 | currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
9293 | ||
9294 | You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
9295 | then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
9296 | vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
9297 | control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
9298 | on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
9299 | ||
9300 | All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
9301 | is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
9302 | `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
9303 | the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
9304 | `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
9305 | ||
9306 | The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
9307 | toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
9308 | VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | |
9309 | `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | |
9310 | ||
9311 | Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
9312 | ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
9313 | command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
9314 | ||
9315 | *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
9316 | file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
9317 | session to resolve them. | |
9318 | ||
9319 | Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
9320 | resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
9321 | contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
9322 | uses as well). | |
9323 | ||
9324 | *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
9325 | command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
9326 | you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
9327 | either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
9328 | branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
9329 | If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
9330 | using ediff. | |
9331 | ||
9332 | ** Changes in Font Lock | |
9333 | ||
9334 | *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
9335 | are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
9336 | use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
9337 | unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
9338 | compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
9339 | ||
9340 | ** Frame name display changes | |
9341 | ||
9342 | *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
9343 | frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
9344 | raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
9345 | when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
9346 | ||
9347 | *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
9348 | frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
9349 | menu. | |
9350 | ||
9351 | ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
9352 | ||
9353 | *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
9354 | subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
9355 | with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
9356 | ||
9357 | *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
9358 | ||
9359 | C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
9360 | that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
9361 | You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
9362 | ||
9363 | C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
9364 | send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
9365 | the following line. | |
9366 | ||
9367 | C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
9368 | which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
9369 | previously sent input. | |
9370 | ||
9371 | C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
9372 | it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
9373 | as the search string. | |
9374 | ||
9375 | *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
9376 | automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
9377 | ||
9378 | ** C mode changes | |
9379 | ||
9380 | *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
9381 | and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
9382 | assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
9383 | definition. | |
9384 | ||
9385 | *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
9386 | (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
9387 | Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
9388 | style is still the default however. | |
9389 | ||
9390 | *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
9391 | ||
9392 | *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
9393 | are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
9394 | them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
9395 | ||
9396 | *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
9397 | and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
9398 | ||
9399 | *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
9400 | namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
9401 | ||
9402 | *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
9403 | makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
9404 | ||
9405 | *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
9406 | c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
9407 | ||
9408 | *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
9409 | should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
9410 | package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
9411 | variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
9412 | ||
9413 | ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
9414 | ||
9415 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | |
9416 | non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | |
9417 | which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
9418 | ||
9419 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
9420 | non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
9421 | expanding dynamically. | |
9422 | ||
9423 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
9424 | non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
9425 | ||
9426 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
9427 | non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
9428 | this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
9429 | expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
9430 | ||
9431 | *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
9432 | ||
9433 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
9434 | ||
9435 | *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
9436 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
9437 | automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
9438 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
9439 | against the first word in the title. | |
9440 | ||
9441 | *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
9442 | capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
9443 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
9444 | lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | |
9445 | lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | |
9446 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | |
9447 | ||
9448 | *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
9449 | generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
9450 | replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
9451 | bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
9452 | ||
9453 | ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
9454 | ||
9455 | *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
9456 | and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
9457 | variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
9458 | entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
9459 | `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
9460 | in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
9461 | ||
9462 | *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
9463 | Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
9464 | ||
9465 | *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
9466 | generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
8a33023e | 9467 | vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
3787e12e GM |
9468 | |
9469 | *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
9470 | vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
9471 | ||
9472 | ** Ispell changes. | |
9473 | ||
9474 | *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | |
9475 | buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
9476 | are identified by syntax tables in effect. | |
9477 | ||
9478 | *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
9479 | A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
9480 | and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
9481 | defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
9482 | include: | |
9483 | ||
9484 | o URLs are automatically skipped | |
9485 | o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
9486 | ||
9487 | *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
9488 | ||
9489 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
9490 | ||
9491 | RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
9492 | large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
9493 | re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
9494 | section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
9495 | ||
9496 | *** New recursive parser. | |
9497 | ||
9498 | The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
9499 | entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
9500 | recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
9501 | ||
9502 | *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
9503 | ||
9504 | Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | |
9505 | partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
9506 | the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
9507 | ||
9508 | (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
9509 | ||
9510 | *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
9511 | ||
9512 | This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
9513 | ||
9514 | (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
9515 | ||
9516 | *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
9517 | ||
9518 | If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
9519 | for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
9520 | ||
9521 | (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
9522 | ||
9523 | *** References to external documents. | |
9524 | ||
9525 | The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
9526 | documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
9527 | documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
9528 | macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
9529 | RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
9530 | the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
9531 | The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
9532 | ||
9533 | *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
9534 | ||
8a33023e | 9535 | The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
3787e12e GM |
9536 | and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
9537 | ||
9538 | Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
9539 | the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
9540 | ||
9541 | *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
9542 | ||
9543 | The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
9544 | buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
9545 | ||
9546 | *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
9547 | ||
9548 | The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
9549 | contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
9550 | `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
9551 | have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
9552 | enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
9553 | at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
9554 | more. | |
9555 | ||
9556 | *** Support for the varioref package | |
9557 | ||
9558 | The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
9559 | ||
9560 | *** New hooks | |
9561 | ||
9562 | Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
9563 | and citations are created. These hooks are | |
9564 | `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
9565 | `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
9566 | ||
9567 | *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
9568 | ||
9569 | The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
9570 | a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
9571 | ||
9572 | *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
9573 | ||
9574 | The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
9575 | fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
9576 | fontified, use | |
9577 | ||
9578 | (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
9579 | ||
9580 | ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
9581 | With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
9582 | the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
9583 | directories that contain the same file name. | |
9584 | ||
9585 | Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
9586 | Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
9587 | file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
9588 | Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
9589 | have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
9590 | names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
9591 | directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
9592 | directory. | |
9593 | ||
9594 | ** New modes and packages | |
9595 | ||
9596 | *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
9597 | It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
9598 | it, but some do not. | |
9599 | ||
9600 | *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
9601 | code. | |
9602 | ||
9603 | *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
9604 | current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
9605 | around in a buffer. | |
9606 | ||
9607 | Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
9608 | ||
9609 | *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
9610 | uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
9611 | be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
9612 | established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
9613 | ||
9614 | *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
9615 | documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
9616 | guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
9617 | ||
9618 | *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
9619 | available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
9620 | system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
9621 | simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
9622 | functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
9623 | the like. | |
9624 | ||
9625 | *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
9626 | identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
9627 | ||
9628 | *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
9629 | within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
9630 | used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
9631 | the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
9632 | ||
9633 | *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
9634 | ||
9635 | apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
9636 | samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
9637 | fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
9638 | x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
9639 | hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
9640 | mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
9641 | javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
9642 | vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
9643 | java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
9644 | java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
9645 | mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
9646 | ||
9647 | Platform-specific modes: | |
9648 | ||
9649 | prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
9650 | pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
9651 | alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
9652 | inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
9653 | ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
9654 | reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
9655 | bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
9656 | rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
9657 | rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
05197f40 | 9658 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
9659 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
9660 | ||
9661 | ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
9662 | use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
9663 | That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
9664 | Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
9665 | ||
9666 | Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
9667 | you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
9668 | consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
9669 | ||
9670 | ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
9671 | and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
9672 | specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
9673 | searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
9674 | ||
9675 | ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
9676 | multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
9677 | character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
9678 | environment. | |
9679 | ||
9680 | ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
9681 | take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
9682 | string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
9683 | current input method for reading this one event. | |
9684 | ||
9685 | ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
9686 | now control whether to output certain characters as | |
9687 | backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
9688 | non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
9689 | characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
9690 | in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
05197f40 | 9691 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
9692 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
9693 | ||
9694 | ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
9695 | of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
9696 | ||
9697 | ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
9698 | in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
9699 | always increases point by 1. | |
9700 | ||
9701 | The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
9702 | considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
9703 | ||
9704 | See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
9705 | ||
9706 | ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
9707 | Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
9708 | default value changed. For example, | |
9709 | ||
9710 | (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
9711 | :type 'integer | |
9712 | :group 'foo | |
9713 | :version "20.3") | |
9714 | ||
9715 | (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | |
9716 | :version "20.3") | |
9717 | ||
9718 | If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
9719 | default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
9720 | is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
9721 | `:version' in the top level group. | |
9722 | ||
9723 | This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
9724 | ||
9725 | ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
9726 | starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
9727 | ||
9728 | However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
9729 | symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
9730 | support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
9731 | to themselves. | |
9732 | ||
9733 | If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
9734 | this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
9735 | values whatever. | |
9736 | ||
9737 | ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
9738 | It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
9739 | in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
9740 | ||
9741 | ** Frame-local variables. | |
9742 | ||
9743 | You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
9744 | the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
9745 | local bindings for that variable. | |
9746 | ||
9747 | These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
9748 | frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
9749 | modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
9750 | parameter name. | |
9751 | ||
9752 | Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
9753 | Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
9754 | active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
9755 | that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
9756 | ||
9757 | It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
9758 | clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
9759 | very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
9760 | through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
9761 | ||
9762 | ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
9763 | "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
9764 | evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
9765 | makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
9766 | See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
9767 | ||
9768 | ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
9769 | is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
9770 | parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
9771 | The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
9772 | ||
9773 | ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
9774 | If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
9775 | ||
9776 | ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
9777 | known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
9778 | define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
9779 | ||
9780 | ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
9781 | when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
9782 | it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
9783 | history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
9784 | ||
9785 | The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
9786 | return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
9787 | empty input. | |
9788 | ||
9789 | ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
9790 | for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
9791 | `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
9792 | Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
9793 | `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
9794 | ||
9795 | ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
9796 | echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
9797 | a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
9798 | default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
9799 | ||
9800 | ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
9801 | specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
9802 | function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
9803 | place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
9804 | non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
9805 | ||
9806 | ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
9807 | If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
9808 | up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
9809 | end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
9810 | ||
9811 | ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
9812 | which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
9813 | If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
9814 | ||
9815 | ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
9816 | holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
9817 | was directed to display this buffer. | |
9818 | ||
9819 | ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
9820 | with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
9821 | describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
9822 | other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
9823 | set-window-configuration. | |
9824 | ||
9825 | ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
9826 | window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
9827 | positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
9828 | windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
9829 | ||
9830 | ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
9831 | override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
9832 | look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
9833 | ||
9834 | If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
9835 | non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
9836 | map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
9837 | ||
9838 | minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
9839 | and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
9840 | ||
9841 | ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
9842 | except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
9843 | ||
9844 | ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
9845 | USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
9846 | floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
9847 | ||
9848 | ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
9849 | to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
9850 | in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
9851 | it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
9852 | ||
9853 | ** Menu changes | |
9854 | ||
9855 | *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
9856 | keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
9857 | better supported. | |
9858 | ||
9859 | The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
9860 | a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
9861 | you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
9862 | can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
9863 | then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
9864 | ||
9865 | *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
9866 | ||
9867 | In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
9868 | (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
9869 | defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
9870 | starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
9871 | ||
9872 | The format is: | |
9873 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
9874 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
9875 | where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
9876 | string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
9877 | The supported properties include | |
9878 | ||
9879 | :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
9880 | item is enabled. | |
9881 | :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
9882 | item should appear in the menu. | |
9883 | :filter FILTER-FN | |
9884 | FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | |
9885 | which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
9886 | It should return a binding to use instead. | |
9887 | :keys DESCRIPTION | |
9888 | DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
f3780fe4 | 9889 | binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
3787e12e GM |
9890 | `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
9891 | :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
9892 | KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
9893 | keyboard binding. | |
9894 | :key-sequence nil | |
9895 | This means that the command normally has no | |
9896 | keyboard equivalent. | |
9897 | :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
9898 | :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
9899 | TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
9900 | SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
9901 | value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
9902 | ||
9903 | Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
9904 | Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
9905 | ||
9906 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
9907 | ||
9908 | ** New event types | |
9909 | ||
9910 | *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
9911 | mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
9912 | corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
9913 | which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
9914 | ||
9915 | (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
9916 | ||
9917 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
9918 | same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
9919 | indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
9920 | negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
9921 | the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
9922 | forward, away from the user. | |
9923 | ||
9924 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
9925 | ||
9926 | *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
9927 | files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
9928 | and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
9929 | filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
9930 | loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
9931 | ||
9932 | (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
9933 | ||
9934 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
9935 | same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
9936 | that were dragged and dropped. | |
9937 | ||
9938 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
9939 | ||
9940 | ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
9941 | ||
9942 | *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
9943 | any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
9944 | to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
9945 | ||
9946 | *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
9947 | can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
9948 | that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
9949 | ||
9950 | *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
9951 | in Emacs 19 and before. | |
9952 | ||
9953 | The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
9954 | The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
9955 | ||
9956 | *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
9957 | buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
9958 | unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
9959 | representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
9960 | ||
9961 | This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
9962 | as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
9963 | viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
9964 | one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
9965 | will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
9966 | ||
9967 | This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
9968 | representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
9969 | (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
9970 | consistent with the new representation. | |
9971 | ||
9972 | *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
9973 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
9974 | about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
9975 | however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
9976 | ||
9977 | The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
9978 | nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
9979 | using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
9980 | ||
9981 | *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
9982 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
9983 | representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
9984 | ||
9985 | The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
9986 | loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
9987 | is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
9988 | ||
9989 | *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
9990 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
9991 | ||
9992 | *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
9993 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
9994 | ||
9995 | *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
9996 | portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
9997 | so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
9998 | You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
9999 | ||
10000 | *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
10001 | it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
10002 | ||
10003 | *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
10004 | convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
10005 | buffer or string being searched. | |
10006 | ||
10007 | One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
10008 | [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
10009 | searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
10010 | searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
10011 | obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
10012 | you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
10013 | expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
10014 | ||
10015 | *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
10016 | ||
10017 | All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
10018 | by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
10019 | which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
10020 | as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
10021 | vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
10022 | your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
10023 | define-coding-system-alias. | |
10024 | ||
10025 | The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
10026 | the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
10027 | access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
10028 | pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
10029 | character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
10030 | safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
10031 | 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
10032 | `iso-8859-1'. | |
10033 | ||
10034 | Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
10035 | The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
10036 | coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
10037 | (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
10038 | ||
10039 | Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
10040 | also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
10041 | are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
10042 | the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
10043 | ||
10044 | *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
10045 | proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
10046 | This function requires a user interaction. | |
10047 | ||
10048 | *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
10049 | find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
10050 | select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
10051 | systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
10052 | a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
10053 | select-safe-coding-system. | |
10054 | ||
10055 | *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
10056 | decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
10057 | last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
10058 | was done. | |
10059 | ||
10060 | *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
10061 | used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
10062 | coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
10063 | ||
10064 | *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
10065 | return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
10066 | characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
10067 | `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
10068 | ||
10069 | *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
10070 | coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
10071 | coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
10072 | converted. | |
10073 | ||
10074 | *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
10075 | coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
10076 | ||
10077 | *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
10078 | character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
10079 | character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
10080 | each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
10081 | either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
10082 | range of characters. | |
10083 | ||
10084 | *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
10085 | Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
10086 | ||
10087 | *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
10088 | in the current buffer at position POS. | |
10089 | ||
10090 | *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
10091 | input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
10092 | function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
10093 | character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
10094 | event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
10095 | binding input-method-function to nil. | |
10096 | ||
10097 | The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
10098 | method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
10099 | input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
10100 | the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
10101 | not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
10102 | ||
10103 | The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
10104 | subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
10105 | ||
10106 | *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
10107 | set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
10108 | ||
10109 | The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
10110 | customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
10111 | instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
10112 | environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
10113 | exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
05197f40 | 10114 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
10115 | * Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
10116 | ||
10117 | ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
10118 | options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
10119 | at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
10120 | tree structure. | |
10121 | ||
10122 | M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
10123 | user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
10124 | ||
10125 | With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
10126 | session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
10127 | in your .emacs file.) | |
10128 | ||
10129 | ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
10130 | You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
10131 | ||
10132 | ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
10133 | This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
10134 | ||
10135 | ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
10136 | immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
10137 | kills the region. | |
10138 | ||
10139 | The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
10140 | delete the character before point, as usual. | |
10141 | ||
10142 | ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
10143 | on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
10144 | by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
10145 | ||
10146 | ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
10147 | insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
10148 | the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
10149 | onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
10150 | history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
10151 | past.) | |
10152 | ||
10153 | ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
10154 | This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
10155 | in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
10156 | TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
10157 | makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
10158 | ||
10159 | As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
10160 | and is an alias for it. | |
10161 | ||
10162 | If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
10163 | use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
10164 | ||
10165 | ** Scrolling changes | |
10166 | ||
10167 | *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
10168 | position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
10169 | ||
10170 | In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
10171 | on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
10172 | where it started. | |
10173 | ||
10174 | *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
10175 | move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
10176 | screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
10177 | does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
10178 | ||
10179 | *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
10180 | top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
10181 | comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
10182 | recenters the window. | |
10183 | ||
10184 | ** International character set support (MULE) | |
10185 | ||
10186 | Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
10187 | including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
10188 | Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
10189 | Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
10190 | features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
10191 | MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
10192 | ||
10193 | Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
10194 | coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
10195 | character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
10196 | variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
10197 | into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
10198 | ||
10199 | Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
10200 | generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
10201 | supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
10202 | language, to make it possible to type them. | |
10203 | ||
10204 | The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
10205 | character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
10206 | ||
10207 | The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
10208 | to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
10209 | ||
10210 | You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
10211 | ||
10212 | (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
10213 | ||
10214 | Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
10215 | characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
10216 | argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
10217 | already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
10218 | characters for their work until they want to change. | |
10219 | ||
10220 | *** Input methods | |
10221 | ||
10222 | An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
10223 | specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
10224 | has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
10225 | the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
10226 | support several input methods. | |
10227 | ||
10228 | The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
10229 | another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
10230 | work. | |
10231 | ||
10232 | A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
10233 | characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
10234 | composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
10235 | consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
10236 | sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
10237 | letter. | |
10238 | ||
10239 | The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
10240 | by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
10241 | First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
10242 | marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
10243 | mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
10244 | ||
10245 | None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
10246 | they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
10247 | phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
10248 | converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
10249 | ||
10250 | Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
10251 | word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
10252 | typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
10253 | the first guess is wrong. | |
10254 | ||
10255 | *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
10256 | turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
10257 | ||
10258 | If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
10259 | byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
10260 | they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
10261 | the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
10262 | ||
10263 | However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
10264 | use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
10265 | includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
10266 | translate automatically to and from either one. | |
10267 | ||
10268 | *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
10269 | ||
10270 | Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
10271 | file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
10272 | sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
10273 | what you want. | |
10274 | ||
10275 | If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
10276 | example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
10277 | system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
10278 | multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
10279 | ||
10280 | If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
10281 | character conversion as well. | |
10282 | ||
10283 | *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
10284 | ||
10285 | A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
10286 | Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
10287 | requires using many fonts. | |
10288 | ||
10289 | Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
10290 | collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
10291 | ||
10292 | A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
10293 | the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
10294 | have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
10295 | you would use a font. | |
10296 | ||
10297 | If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
10298 | specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
10299 | display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
10300 | ||
10301 | The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
10302 | (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
f327c2f9 | 10303 | characters). |
3787e12e GM |
10304 | |
10305 | *** Defining fontsets. | |
10306 | ||
10307 | Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
10308 | chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
10309 | with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
10310 | ||
10311 | Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
10312 | of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
10313 | `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
10314 | standard fontset are created automatically. | |
10315 | ||
10316 | If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
10317 | argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
10318 | FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
10319 | with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
10320 | name is `fontset-startup'. | |
10321 | ||
10322 | Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
10323 | The resource value should have this form: | |
10324 | FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
10325 | FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
10326 | * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
10327 | * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
10328 | * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
10329 | The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
10330 | of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
0969bd6a EZ |
10331 | CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
10332 | should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
3787e12e GM |
10333 | |
10334 | Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
10335 | last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
10336 | You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
10337 | ||
10338 | For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
10339 | font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
10340 | following resource, | |
10341 | Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
10342 | the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
10343 | -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
10344 | Here is the substitution rule: | |
10345 | Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
10346 | defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
10347 | the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
10348 | sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
10349 | (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
10350 | ||
10351 | The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
10352 | fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
10353 | that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
10354 | ||
10355 | With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
10356 | like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
10357 | name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
10358 | fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
10359 | fontsets. | |
10360 | ||
10361 | *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
10362 | defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
10363 | ||
10364 | Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
10365 | method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
10366 | visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
10367 | already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
10368 | language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
10369 | system for new files that you create. | |
10370 | ||
10371 | It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
10372 | set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
10373 | whole Emacs session. | |
10374 | ||
10375 | For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
10376 | chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
10377 | with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
10378 | ||
10379 | *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
10380 | specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
10381 | specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
10382 | the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
10383 | coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
10384 | ||
10385 | *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
10386 | lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
10387 | This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
10388 | After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
10389 | is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
10390 | ||
10391 | So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
10392 | write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
10393 | ||
10394 | If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
10395 | then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
10396 | ||
c3518b63 | 10397 | For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET |
3787e12e GM |
10398 | visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. |
10399 | ||
10400 | *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
10401 | construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
10402 | to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
10403 | specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
10404 | of the file. | |
10405 | ||
10406 | *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
10407 | the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
10408 | code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
10409 | translated into that character code. | |
10410 | ||
10411 | This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
10412 | various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
10413 | ||
10414 | By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
10415 | ||
10416 | *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
10417 | the coding system for keyboard input. | |
10418 | ||
10419 | Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
10420 | with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
10421 | some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
10422 | ||
10423 | By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
10424 | ||
10425 | Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
10426 | input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
10427 | translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
10428 | to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
10429 | designed to work with terminals. | |
10430 | ||
10431 | *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
10432 | specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
10433 | This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
10434 | has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
10435 | translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
10436 | in the corresponding buffer. | |
10437 | ||
10438 | By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
10439 | ||
10440 | *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
10441 | to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
10442 | It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
10443 | ||
10444 | *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
10445 | an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
10446 | command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
10447 | want to use. | |
10448 | ||
10449 | C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
10450 | method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
10451 | ||
10452 | *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
10453 | layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
10454 | remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
10455 | which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
10456 | ||
10457 | *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
10458 | the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
10459 | related information. | |
10460 | ||
10461 | *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
10462 | HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
10463 | scripts. | |
10464 | ||
10465 | *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
10466 | information about the support for a particular language. | |
10467 | You specify the language as an argument. | |
10468 | ||
10469 | *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
10470 | the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
10471 | first dash. | |
10472 | ||
10473 | A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
10474 | (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
10475 | whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
10476 | 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
10477 | ||
10478 | A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
10479 | B big5 (Chinese) | |
10480 | C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
10481 | C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
10482 | D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
10483 | E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
10484 | I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
10485 | J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
10486 | K euc-korea (Korean) | |
10487 | R koi8 (Russian) | |
10488 | Q tibetan | |
10489 | S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
10490 | T lao | |
10491 | T tis620 (Thai) | |
10492 | V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
10493 | i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
10494 | k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
10495 | v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
10496 | z hz (Chinese) | |
10497 | ||
10498 | When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
10499 | two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
10500 | coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
10501 | keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
10502 | ||
10503 | *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
10504 | conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
10505 | ||
10506 | When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
10507 | into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
10508 | rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
10509 | Rmail files themselves. | |
10510 | ||
10511 | *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
10512 | conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
10513 | ||
10514 | Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
10515 | for sending mail: | |
10516 | ||
10517 | - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
10518 | - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
10519 | - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
10520 | if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
10521 | - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
10522 | ||
10523 | *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
10524 | to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
10525 | Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
10526 | translations. | |
10527 | ||
10528 | ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
10529 | of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
10530 | insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
10531 | without any conversion. | |
10532 | ||
10533 | ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
10534 | You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
10535 | RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
10536 | any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
10537 | ||
10538 | ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
10539 | functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
10540 | ||
10541 | Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
10542 | Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
10543 | ||
10544 | Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
10545 | mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
10546 | ||
10547 | ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
10548 | complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
10549 | in the buffer before point. | |
10550 | ||
10551 | With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
10552 | symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
10553 | you are using. | |
10554 | ||
10555 | With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
10556 | just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
10557 | ||
10558 | ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
10559 | ||
10560 | The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
10561 | in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
10562 | ||
10563 | This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
10564 | works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
10565 | can become a bottleneck. | |
10566 | ||
10567 | The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
10568 | does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
10569 | create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
10570 | file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
10571 | rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
10572 | so useful that the change is worth while. | |
10573 | ||
10574 | When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
10575 | are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
10576 | collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
10577 | tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
10578 | ||
10579 | ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
10580 | it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
10581 | show-paren-mode. | |
10582 | ||
10583 | ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
10584 | selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
10585 | delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
10586 | ||
10587 | ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
10588 | within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
10589 | complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
10590 | ||
10591 | ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
10592 | it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
10593 | set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
10594 | ||
10595 | ** Changes in View mode. | |
10596 | ||
10597 | *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
10598 | Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
10599 | ||
10600 | *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
10601 | view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
10602 | ||
10603 | *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
10604 | previous state. | |
10605 | ||
10606 | *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
10607 | scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
10608 | ||
10609 | *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
10610 | non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
10611 | not just the selected window. | |
10612 | ||
10613 | *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
10614 | read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
10615 | turns View mode on or off. | |
10616 | ||
10617 | *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
10618 | how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
10619 | delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
10620 | ||
10621 | ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
10622 | now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
10623 | ||
10624 | ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
10625 | has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
10626 | presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
10627 | which version to compare with. | |
10628 | ||
10629 | ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
10630 | blocks if a match is inside the block. | |
10631 | ||
10632 | The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
10633 | is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
10634 | isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
10635 | shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
10636 | ||
10637 | By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
10638 | of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
10639 | blocks, all of them or none. | |
10640 | ||
10641 | ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
10642 | current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
10643 | confirmation first. | |
10644 | ||
10645 | ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
10646 | now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
10647 | However, the mode will not be changed if | |
10648 | (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
10649 | (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
10650 | not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
10651 | (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
10652 | ||
10653 | This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
10654 | ||
10655 | However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
10656 | these commands do not change the major mode. | |
10657 | ||
10658 | ** M-x occur changes. | |
10659 | ||
10660 | *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
10661 | it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
10662 | ||
10663 | *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
10664 | if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
10665 | using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
10666 | ||
10667 | ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
10668 | in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
10669 | window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
10670 | that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
10671 | buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
10672 | ||
10673 | ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
10674 | after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
10675 | appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
10676 | come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
10677 | ||
10678 | ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
10679 | selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
10680 | buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
10681 | ||
10682 | ** Outline mode changes. | |
10683 | ||
10684 | *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
10685 | ||
10686 | *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
10687 | ||
10688 | ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
10689 | you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
10690 | Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
10691 | was already active. | |
10692 | ||
10693 | The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
10694 | unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
10695 | get confused by it. | |
10696 | ||
10697 | If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
10698 | set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
10699 | ||
10700 | ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
10701 | ||
10702 | *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
10703 | conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
10704 | character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
10705 | including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
10706 | ||
10707 | The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
10708 | mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
10709 | copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
10710 | ||
10711 | *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
10712 | are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
10713 | values. | |
10714 | ||
10715 | `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
10716 | case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
10717 | `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
10718 | case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
10719 | ||
10720 | ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
10721 | certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
10722 | can be. The default value is 30. | |
10723 | ||
10724 | ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
10725 | ||
10726 | *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
10727 | Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
10728 | composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
10729 | `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
10730 | `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
10731 | behavior. | |
10732 | ||
10733 | C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
10734 | compose-mail-other-frame. | |
10735 | ||
10736 | *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
10737 | the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
10738 | replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
10739 | buffer that shows the original message. | |
10740 | ||
10741 | *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
10742 | with separator lines around the contents. | |
10743 | ||
10744 | *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
10745 | in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
10746 | definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
10747 | need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
10748 | ||
10749 | *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
10750 | ||
10751 | **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
10752 | for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
10753 | controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
10754 | Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
10755 | ||
10756 | **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
10757 | to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
10758 | /etc/passwd. | |
10759 | ||
10760 | **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
10761 | to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
10762 | /etc/passwd. | |
10763 | ||
10764 | ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
10765 | special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
10766 | directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
10767 | reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
10768 | ||
10769 | Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
10770 | when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
10771 | be taken to be magic. | |
10772 | ||
10773 | ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
10774 | files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
10775 | available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
10776 | ||
10777 | M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
10778 | (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
10779 | ||
10780 | ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
10781 | suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
10782 | ||
10783 | In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
10784 | ||
10785 | new key dired.el binding old key | |
10786 | ------- ---------------- ------- | |
10787 | * c dired-change-marks c | |
10788 | * m dired-mark m | |
10789 | * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
10790 | * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
10791 | * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
10792 | * u dired-unmark u | |
10793 | * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
3a426197 | 10794 | * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-? |
3787e12e GM |
10795 | * ! dired-unmark-all-marks |
10796 | * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
10797 | * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
10798 | * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
10799 | ||
10800 | ** Rmail changes. | |
10801 | ||
10802 | *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
10803 | saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
10804 | chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
10805 | each time you run it. | |
10806 | ||
10807 | *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
10808 | whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
10809 | ||
10810 | *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
10811 | messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
10812 | means to move in the opposite direction. | |
10813 | ||
10814 | *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
10815 | you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
10816 | ||
10817 | *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
10818 | just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
10819 | It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
10820 | can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
10821 | for output. | |
10822 | ||
10823 | ** Gnus changes. | |
10824 | ||
10825 | *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
10826 | ||
10827 | *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | |
10828 | Gnus. | |
10829 | ||
10830 | *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
10831 | `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | |
10832 | ||
10833 | *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
10834 | article mode line. | |
10835 | ||
10836 | *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
10837 | ||
10838 | *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
10839 | ||
10840 | (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
10841 | ||
10842 | *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
10843 | are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
10844 | `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
10845 | ||
10846 | *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
10847 | ||
10848 | *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
10849 | ||
10850 | *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
10851 | See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
10852 | ||
10853 | *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
10854 | Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
10855 | used to pick articles. | |
10856 | ||
10857 | *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
10858 | another have been added. | |
10859 | ||
10860 | `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
10861 | ||
10862 | *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
10863 | generating lines in buffers. | |
10864 | ||
10865 | *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
3a426197 | 10866 | `C-M-_'. |
3787e12e GM |
10867 | |
10868 | *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
10869 | ||
10870 | *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
10871 | ||
10872 | (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
10873 | ||
10874 | *** Scores can be decayed. | |
10875 | ||
10876 | (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | |
10877 | ||
10878 | *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
10879 | Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
10880 | ||
10881 | *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
10882 | the native server. | |
10883 | ||
10884 | `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
10885 | ||
10886 | *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
3a426197 | 10887 | (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'. |
3787e12e GM |
10888 | |
10889 | *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
10890 | ||
10891 | *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
10892 | even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
10893 | ||
10894 | *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
10895 | (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
10896 | ||
10897 | Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
10898 | a group. | |
10899 | ||
10900 | *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
10901 | sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
10902 | ||
10903 | See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
10904 | ||
10905 | *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
10906 | ||
10907 | See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
10908 | ||
10909 | *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
10910 | ||
10911 | Use the `Y c' command. | |
10912 | ||
10913 | *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
10914 | ||
10915 | *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
10916 | ||
10917 | `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
10918 | ||
10919 | *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
10920 | from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
10921 | ||
10922 | See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | |
10923 | ||
10924 | *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
10925 | ||
10926 | *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
10927 | the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
10928 | ||
10929 | (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
10930 | ||
10931 | Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
10932 | and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
10933 | from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
10934 | hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
10935 | this issue.) | |
10936 | ||
10937 | Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
10938 | automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
10939 | particular news group. This can be done by: | |
10940 | ||
10941 | (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
10942 | ||
10943 | Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
10944 | of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
10945 | "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
10946 | system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
10947 | for reading and posting). | |
10948 | ||
10949 | CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
10950 | (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
10951 | Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
10952 | newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
10953 | there. | |
10954 | ||
10955 | Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
10956 | default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
10957 | ||
10958 | (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
10959 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
10960 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
10961 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
10962 | (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
10963 | ||
10964 | When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
10965 | the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
10966 | ||
10967 | ** CC mode changes. | |
10968 | ||
10969 | *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
10970 | code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
10971 | values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
10972 | this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
10973 | Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
10974 | loaded. | |
10975 | ||
10976 | If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
10977 | Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | |
10978 | style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | |
10979 | share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | |
10980 | c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
10981 | must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | |
10982 | ||
10983 | *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
10984 | of the current buffer. | |
10985 | ||
10986 | *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
10987 | it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
10988 | of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
10989 | ||
10990 | *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
10991 | style that the Python developers like. | |
10992 | ||
10993 | *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
10994 | This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
10995 | just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
10996 | ||
10997 | ** VC Changes [new] | |
10998 | ||
9614842d | 10999 | *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
3787e12e GM |
11000 | name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
11001 | directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
11002 | ||
11003 | This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
11004 | master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
11005 | developers. | |
11006 | ||
11007 | You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
11008 | RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
11009 | ||
11010 | *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
11011 | other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
11012 | writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
11013 | calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
11014 | ||
11015 | *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
11016 | version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
11017 | ||
11018 | ** Calendar changes. | |
11019 | ||
9614842d JW |
11020 | *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or |
11021 | subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow | |
11022 | you do this for the year of the selected date, or the | |
11023 | following/previous years. | |
11024 | ||
11025 | *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in | |
11026 | the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i | |
11027 | calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days | |
11028 | each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The | |
11029 | calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a | |
11030 | supposed attribute of God. | |
3787e12e GM |
11031 | |
11032 | ** ps-print changes | |
11033 | ||
2261f14e GM |
11034 | There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page |
11035 | layout. | |
3787e12e | 11036 | |
2261f14e | 11037 | *** Headers & Footers (subgroup) |
3787e12e | 11038 | |
2261f14e GM |
11039 | Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to |
11040 | be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your | |
11041 | printer system has this behavior, set variable | |
11042 | `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t. | |
3787e12e | 11043 | |
2261f14e GM |
11044 | If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a |
11045 | blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the | |
a5d03456 | 11046 | very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014). |
3787e12e | 11047 | |
2261f14e GM |
11048 | The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for |
11049 | setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are: | |
3787e12e | 11050 | |
2261f14e GM |
11051 | lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'. |
11052 | Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex | |
11053 | printing for your printer. | |
3787e12e | 11054 | |
2261f14e GM |
11055 | setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the |
11056 | setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
3787e12e | 11057 | |
2261f14e GM |
11058 | nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using |
11059 | the setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
3787e12e | 11060 | |
2261f14e GM |
11061 | The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on |
11062 | opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If | |
11063 | `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for | |
11064 | bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil, | |
11065 | ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom. | |
11066 | This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil. | |
11067 | The default value is nil. | |
3787e12e | 11068 | |
2261f14e GM |
11069 | The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame |
11070 | properties alist. Valid frame properties are: | |
3787e12e | 11071 | |
2261f14e GM |
11072 | fore-color Specify the foreground frame color. |
11073 | Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black | |
11074 | color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a | |
11075 | color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which | |
11076 | correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each | |
11077 | float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright | |
11078 | color). The default is 0 ("black"). | |
3787e12e | 11079 | |
2261f14e GM |
11080 | back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color). |
11081 | The default is 0.9 ("gray90"). | |
11082 | ||
11083 | shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color). | |
11084 | The default is 0 ("black"). | |
11085 | ||
11086 | border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color). | |
11087 | The default is 0 ("black"). | |
11088 | ||
11089 | border-width Specify the border width. | |
11090 | The default is 0.4. | |
11091 | ||
11092 | Any other property is ignored. | |
11093 | ||
11094 | Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the | |
11095 | `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for | |
11096 | documentation). | |
11097 | ||
11098 | Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are: | |
11099 | `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame', | |
11100 | `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad', | |
11101 | `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and | |
11102 | `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those | |
11103 | controlling headers. | |
3787e12e | 11104 | |
2261f14e GM |
11105 | *** Color management (subgroup) |
11106 | ||
11107 | If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in | |
11108 | color. | |
11109 | ||
11110 | *** Face Management (subgroup) | |
3787e12e | 11111 | |
2261f14e GM |
11112 | If you need to print without worrying about face background colors, |
11113 | set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face | |
11114 | background should be used. Valid values are: | |
11115 | ||
11116 | t always use face background color. | |
11117 | nil never use face background color. | |
11118 | (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used. | |
11119 | ||
11120 | *** N-up printing (subgroup) | |
11121 | ||
11122 | The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per | |
11123 | sheet of paper. | |
11124 | ||
11125 | The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt) | |
11126 | between the sheet border and the n-up printing. | |
11127 | ||
11128 | If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around | |
11129 | each page. | |
11130 | ||
11131 | The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled | |
11132 | on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for | |
11133 | `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix: | |
11134 | ||
11135 | `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12 | |
11136 | 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 | |
11137 | 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 | |
3787e12e | 11138 | |
2261f14e GM |
11139 | `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9 |
11140 | 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 | |
11141 | 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 | |
11142 | ||
11143 | `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12 | |
11144 | 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11 | |
11145 | 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10 | |
11146 | ||
11147 | `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3 | |
11148 | 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2 | |
11149 | 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1 | |
3787e12e | 11150 | |
2261f14e GM |
11151 | Any other value is treated as `left-top'. |
11152 | ||
11153 | *** Zebra stripes (subgroup) | |
3787e12e | 11154 | |
2261f14e GM |
11155 | The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or |
11156 | RGB color. | |
11157 | ||
11158 | The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes | |
11159 | continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+' | |
11160 | to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed): | |
11161 | ||
11162 | `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow' | |
11163 | Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
11164 | 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11165 | 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11166 | 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11167 | 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + | |
11168 | 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + | |
11169 | 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + | |
11170 | 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11171 | 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11172 | 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11173 | 10 + 10 + | |
11174 | 11 + 11 + | |
11175 | -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
11176 | Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
11177 | 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 + | |
11178 | 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 + | |
11179 | 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 + | |
11180 | 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11181 | 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11182 | 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
11183 | 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 + | |
11184 | 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 + | |
11185 | 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 + | |
11186 | 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX + | |
11187 | 22 + 22 + | |
11188 | -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
11189 | ||
11190 | Any other value is treated as `nil'. | |
11191 | ||
11192 | ||
11193 | *** Printer management (subgroup) | |
11194 | ||
11195 | The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by | |
11196 | some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when | |
11197 | `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr | |
11198 | utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set | |
11199 | to "-P". | |
11200 | ||
11201 | The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual | |
11202 | paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's | |
11203 | non-nil, manual feeding takes place. | |
11204 | ||
11205 | The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04) | |
11206 | should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means | |
11207 | do so. | |
11208 | ||
11209 | *** Page settings (subgroup) | |
11210 | ||
11211 | If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an | |
11212 | error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size | |
11213 | indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used | |
11214 | instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if | |
11215 | the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated | |
11216 | by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to | |
11217 | `setpagedevice'. | |
11218 | ||
11219 | The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for | |
11220 | printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means | |
11221 | `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees). | |
11222 | ||
11223 | The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If | |
11224 | it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be | |
11225 | integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO) | |
11226 | specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that | |
11227 | is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than | |
11228 | its TO, are ignored. | |
11229 | ||
11230 | The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd | |
11231 | pages. Valid values are: | |
11232 | ||
11233 | nil print all pages. | |
11234 | ||
11235 | `even-page' print only even pages. | |
11236 | ||
11237 | `odd-page' print only odd pages. | |
11238 | ||
11239 | `even-sheet' print only even sheets. | |
11240 | That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
11241 | `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll | |
11242 | print only the even sheet of paper. | |
11243 | ||
11244 | `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets. | |
11245 | That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
11246 | `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print | |
11247 | only the odd sheet of paper. | |
11248 | ||
11249 | Any other value is treated as nil. | |
11250 | ||
11251 | If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages | |
11252 | are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by | |
11253 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have: | |
11254 | ||
11255 | (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20)) | |
11256 | ||
11257 | and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and | |
11258 | `ps-n-up-printing', we get: | |
11259 | ||
11260 | `ps-n-up-printing' = 1: | |
11261 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
11262 | nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 | |
11263 | even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
11264 | odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
11265 | even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
11266 | odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
11267 | ||
11268 | `ps-n-up-printing' = 2: | |
11269 | `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
11270 | nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20 | |
11271 | even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20 | |
11272 | odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15 | |
11273 | even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16 | |
11274 | odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20 | |
11275 | ||
11276 | *** Miscellany (subgroup) | |
11277 | ||
11278 | The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler | |
11279 | messages should be sent. | |
11280 | ||
11281 | It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in | |
11282 | front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable | |
11283 | `ps-user-defined-prologue'. | |
11284 | ||
11285 | The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers. | |
11286 | ||
11287 | The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in | |
11288 | points for line numbers. | |
11289 | ||
11290 | The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line | |
11291 | numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation. | |
11292 | ||
11293 | The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which | |
11294 | line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set | |
11295 | to 2, the printing will look like: | |
11296 | ||
11297 | 1 one line | |
11298 | one line | |
11299 | 3 one line | |
11300 | one line | |
11301 | 5 one line | |
11302 | one line | |
11303 | ... | |
11304 | ||
11305 | Valid values are: | |
11306 | ||
11307 | integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are | |
11308 | printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1 | |
11309 | is used. | |
11310 | ||
11311 | `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a | |
11312 | zebra stripe is to be printed. | |
11313 | ||
11314 | Any other value is treated as `zebra'. | |
11315 | ||
11316 | The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in | |
11317 | the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if | |
11318 | `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to | |
11319 | 3, the output will look like: | |
11320 | ||
11321 | one line | |
11322 | one line | |
11323 | 3 one line | |
11324 | one line | |
11325 | one line | |
11326 | 6 one line | |
11327 | one line | |
11328 | one line | |
11329 | 9 one line | |
11330 | one line | |
11331 | ... | |
11332 | ||
11333 | The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory | |
11334 | where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found. | |
11335 | ||
11336 | The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points, | |
11337 | for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
11338 | `ps-font-size'). | |
11339 | ||
11340 | The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing, | |
11341 | in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
11342 | `ps-font-size'). | |
11343 | ||
11344 | The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter. | |
11345 | ||
11346 | The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the | |
11347 | start and end of a region to cut out when printing. | |
3787e12e GM |
11348 | |
11349 | ** hideshow changes. | |
11350 | ||
11351 | *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
11352 | C++, ; for lisp). | |
11353 | ||
11354 | *** Support for java-mode added. | |
11355 | ||
11356 | *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
11357 | in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
11358 | ||
f3780fe4 | 11359 | *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
3787e12e GM |
11360 | the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
11361 | way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
11362 | ||
11363 | *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
11364 | robust and a lot faster. | |
11365 | ||
11366 | *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | |
11367 | ||
11368 | *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
11369 | to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
11370 | documentation for more details. | |
11371 | ||
11372 | ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
11373 | ||
11374 | *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
11375 | filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
11376 | of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
11377 | use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
11378 | the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
11379 | ||
11380 | *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
11381 | distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
11382 | as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
11383 | as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
11384 | ||
11385 | ** Font Lock mode | |
11386 | ||
11387 | *** Custom support | |
11388 | ||
11389 | The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
11390 | font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
11391 | faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
11392 | group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
11393 | your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
11394 | consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
11395 | ||
11396 | You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
11397 | ||
11398 | *** Maximum decoration | |
11399 | ||
11400 | Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
11401 | default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
11402 | of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
11403 | supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
11404 | to get the old behavior. | |
11405 | ||
11406 | *** New support | |
11407 | ||
11408 | Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
11409 | ||
11410 | Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
11411 | support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
11412 | ||
11413 | *** Configurable support | |
11414 | ||
11415 | Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
11416 | additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
11417 | c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
11418 | java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
11419 | list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
11420 | of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
11421 | convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
11422 | ||
11423 | Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
11424 | way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
11425 | it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
11426 | ||
11427 | *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
11428 | ||
11429 | You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
11430 | highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
11431 | for any mode. | |
11432 | ||
11433 | For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
11434 | ||
11435 | (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
11436 | ||
11437 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
11438 | ||
11439 | *** New faces | |
11440 | ||
11441 | Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
11442 | font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
11443 | distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
11444 | to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
11445 | ||
11446 | *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
11447 | ||
11448 | The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
11449 | cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
11450 | same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
11451 | ||
11452 | *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
11453 | ||
11454 | The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
11455 | according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
11456 | the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
11457 | non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
11458 | refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
11459 | the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
dfd67a62 | 11460 | Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode. |
3787e12e GM |
11461 | |
11462 | This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
11463 | For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
11464 | this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
11465 | refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
11466 | containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
11467 | the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
11468 | ||
11469 | As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
11470 | ||
11471 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
11472 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
11473 | Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
11474 | new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
11475 | ||
11476 | If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
11477 | settings. | |
11478 | ||
11479 | ** Ada mode changes. | |
11480 | ||
11481 | *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
11482 | If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
11483 | procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
11484 | you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
11485 | stubs. | |
11486 | ||
11487 | *** There are two new commands: | |
11488 | - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
11489 | - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
11490 | ||
11491 | The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
11492 | `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
11493 | `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | |
11494 | ||
11495 | *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
11496 | is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
11497 | Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
11498 | ||
11499 | *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
11500 | formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
11501 | places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
11502 | space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
11503 | ||
11504 | ** Scheme mode changes. | |
11505 | ||
11506 | *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
11507 | mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
11508 | for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
11509 | with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
11510 | have any effect. | |
11511 | ||
11512 | If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
11513 | still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
11514 | scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
11515 | variables as buffer-local variables. | |
11516 | ||
11517 | *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
11518 | Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
11519 | ||
11520 | ** Changes to the emacsclient program | |
11521 | ||
11522 | *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or | |
11523 | USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
11524 | associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
11525 | can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
11526 | ||
11527 | *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
11528 | it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | |
11529 | buffer in Emacs. | |
11530 | ||
11531 | *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to | |
11532 | use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable | |
11533 | ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line | |
11534 | option takes precedence. | |
11535 | ||
11536 | ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | |
11537 | constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
11538 | (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
11539 | ||
11540 | ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
11541 | which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
11542 | the current defun. | |
11543 | ||
11544 | ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
11545 | following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
11546 | ||
11547 | ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
11548 | and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
11549 | necessary). | |
11550 | ||
11551 | ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
11552 | if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
11553 | these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
11554 | If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
11555 | asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
11556 | it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
11557 | ||
11558 | ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
11559 | example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
11560 | be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
11561 | you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
11562 | ||
11563 | You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
11564 | variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
11565 | file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
11566 | revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
11567 | only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
11568 | ||
11569 | ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
11570 | since it applies only to the current frame. | |
11571 | ||
11572 | ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
11573 | file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
11574 | and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
11575 | ||
11576 | This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
11577 | multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
11578 | variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
11579 | tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
11580 | instead of just the file you are editing. | |
11581 | ||
11582 | ** RefTeX mode | |
11583 | ||
11584 | RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
11585 | and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
11586 | different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
11587 | multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
11588 | turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
11589 | ||
11590 | C-c ( reftex-label | |
11591 | Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | |
11592 | knows which kind of label is needed. | |
11593 | ||
11594 | C-c ) reftex-reference | |
11595 | Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
11596 | label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
11597 | ||
11598 | C-c [ reftex-citation | |
11599 | Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
11600 | database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
11601 | ||
11602 | C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
11603 | Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
11604 | ||
11605 | C-c = reftex-toc | |
11606 | Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
11607 | can quickly jump to every section. | |
11608 | ||
11609 | Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | |
11610 | commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
11611 | Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
11612 | reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
11613 | C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
11614 | ||
11615 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
11616 | ||
11617 | *** Info documentation is now available. | |
11618 | ||
11619 | *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
11620 | both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
11621 | ||
11622 | *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
11623 | bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
11624 | ||
11625 | *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
11626 | (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
11627 | ||
11628 | *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
11629 | entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
11630 | appropriate functions. | |
11631 | ||
11632 | *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
3a426197 | 11633 | entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h. |
3787e12e GM |
11634 | |
11635 | *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
11636 | been cleaned. | |
11637 | ||
11638 | *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
11639 | bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
11640 | ||
11641 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
11642 | shall be delimited. | |
11643 | ||
11644 | *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
11645 | bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
11646 | bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
11647 | ||
11648 | *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
11649 | field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
11650 | prefixed with `ALT'. | |
11651 | ||
11652 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
11653 | bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
11654 | formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
11655 | documentation). | |
11656 | ||
11657 | *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
11658 | documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
11659 | for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
11660 | ||
11661 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
11662 | comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
11663 | ||
11664 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
11665 | alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
11666 | signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
11667 | ||
11668 | *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
11669 | ||
11670 | *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
11671 | ||
11672 | *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
11673 | from alien sources. | |
11674 | ||
11675 | *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
11676 | to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
11677 | crossref entries. | |
11678 | ||
11679 | *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
11680 | region. | |
11681 | ||
11682 | *** Added support for imenu. | |
11683 | ||
11684 | *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
11685 | of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
11686 | `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
11687 | `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
11688 | ||
11689 | *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
11690 | from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
11691 | ||
11692 | ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
11693 | ||
11694 | ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. | |
11695 | ||
11696 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | |
11697 | functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
11698 | Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
11699 | as an argument. | |
11700 | ||
11701 | When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
11702 | and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
11703 | ||
11704 | ** browse-url changes | |
11705 | ||
11706 | *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
11707 | Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
11708 | (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
11709 | non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
11710 | customization variables. | |
11711 | ||
11712 | *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
11713 | ||
11714 | *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
11715 | lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
11716 | (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
11717 | ||
11718 | ** Changes in Ediff | |
11719 | ||
11720 | *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
11721 | pops up the Info file for this command. | |
11722 | ||
11723 | *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
11724 | the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
11725 | merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
11726 | directories). | |
11727 | ||
11728 | *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
11729 | and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
11730 | files in the same directory. | |
11731 | ||
11732 | *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
11733 | The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
11734 | related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
11735 | ||
11736 | ** Changes in Viper | |
11737 | ||
11738 | *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
11739 | *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | |
11740 | instead of vip-. | |
11741 | *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
11742 | *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | |
11743 | Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | |
11744 | *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
11745 | *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
11746 | *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
11747 | color when Viper is in insert state. | |
11748 | *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
11749 | Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
11750 | viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
11751 | ||
11752 | ** Etags changes. | |
11753 | ||
11754 | *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
11755 | default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
11756 | Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
11757 | variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
11758 | not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
11759 | ||
11760 | *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
11761 | ||
11762 | *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
11763 | constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
11764 | ||
11765 | *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
11766 | recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
11767 | In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
11768 | ||
11769 | *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
11770 | C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
11771 | recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
11772 | methods and protocols. | |
11773 | ||
11774 | *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
11775 | .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
11776 | column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
11777 | paragraph name. | |
11778 | ||
11779 | *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
11780 | an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
11781 | at least M times and as many as N times. | |
11782 | ||
11783 | ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
11784 | in files has changed slightly. | |
11785 | ||
11786 | With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
11787 | time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
11788 | This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
11789 | with old time-stamp-format values. | |
11790 | ||
11791 | In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
11792 | (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
11793 | This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
11794 | reasons. | |
11795 | ||
11796 | In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
11797 | natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
11798 | fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
11799 | (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
11800 | time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
11801 | specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
11802 | ||
11803 | Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
11804 | case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
11805 | truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
11806 | ||
11807 | The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
11808 | being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
11809 | future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
11810 | recommended now will continue to work then. | |
11811 | ||
11812 | See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
11813 | details. | |
11814 | ||
11815 | ** There are some additional major modes: | |
11816 | ||
11817 | dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
11818 | m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
11819 | meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
11820 | ||
11821 | ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
11822 | copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
11823 | into Emacs. | |
11824 | ||
11825 | ** New Lisp packages include: | |
11826 | ||
11827 | *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
11828 | ||
11829 | *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
11830 | be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
11831 | ||
11832 | *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
11833 | ||
11834 | *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
11835 | in shell buffers. | |
11836 | ||
11837 | *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
11838 | See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
11839 | and `elint-defun'. | |
11840 | ||
11841 | *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
11842 | meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
11843 | ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
11844 | strings or comments. | |
11845 | ||
11846 | These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
11847 | abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
11848 | you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
11849 | insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
11850 | at these points. | |
11851 | ||
11852 | *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
11853 | can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
11854 | ||
11855 | *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
11856 | Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
11857 | ||
11858 | *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
11859 | ||
11860 | *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
11861 | switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
11862 | ||
11863 | *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
11864 | ||
11865 | *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
11866 | ||
11867 | *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
11868 | ||
11869 | *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
11870 | from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
11871 | ||
11872 | *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
11873 | You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
11874 | inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
11875 | original place after inserting the copy. | |
11876 | ||
11877 | *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
11878 | on the buffer. | |
11879 | ||
11880 | You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
11881 | velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
11882 | (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
11883 | ||
11884 | Enable mouse-drag with: | |
11885 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
11886 | -or- | |
11887 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
11888 | ||
11889 | *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
11890 | mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
11891 | ||
11892 | *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
11893 | It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
11894 | ||
11895 | *** ogonek | |
11896 | ||
11897 | The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
11898 | Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
11899 | platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
11900 | TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
11901 | ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
11902 | prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
11903 | instance) and vice versa. | |
11904 | ||
11905 | To use this package load it using | |
11906 | M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
11907 | Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
11908 | M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | |
11909 | M-x ogonek-how -- in English | |
11910 | The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
11911 | ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
11912 | ||
11913 | *** Interface to ph. | |
11914 | ||
11915 | Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
11916 | ||
11917 | The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
11918 | services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
11919 | these servers. | |
11920 | ||
11921 | *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
11922 | ||
11923 | *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
11924 | You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
11925 | while the real cursor does not move. | |
11926 | ||
11927 | *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
11928 | for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
11929 | ||
11930 | *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
11931 | so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
11932 | ||
11933 | ** movemail change | |
11934 | ||
11935 | Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
11936 | mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
11937 | supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
11938 | user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
11939 | ||
11940 | This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
05197f40 | 11941 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
11942 | * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
11943 | ||
11944 | ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
11945 | ||
11946 | Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
11947 | end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
11948 | Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
11949 | file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
11950 | file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
11951 | ||
11952 | To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
11953 | C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
11954 | coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
11955 | specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
11956 | LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
11957 | save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
05197f40 | 11958 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
11959 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
11960 | ||
11961 | ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
11962 | Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
11963 | vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
11964 | Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
11965 | ||
11966 | ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
11967 | to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
11968 | ||
11969 | In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
11970 | don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
11971 | "win". | |
11972 | ||
11973 | ** Basic Lisp changes | |
11974 | ||
11975 | *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
11976 | evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
11977 | ||
11978 | *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
11979 | be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
11980 | or by the user. | |
11981 | ||
11982 | The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
11983 | ||
11984 | *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
11985 | ||
11986 | (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
11987 | (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
11988 | ||
11989 | *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
11990 | usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
11991 | its argument. | |
11992 | ||
11993 | *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
11994 | ||
11995 | *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
11996 | ||
11997 | *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
11998 | ||
11999 | *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
12000 | error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
12001 | include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
12002 | `format' function. | |
12003 | ||
12004 | *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
12005 | or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
12006 | whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
12007 | ||
12008 | *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
12009 | either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
12010 | adding one of these suffixes. | |
12011 | ||
12012 | *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
12013 | which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
12014 | If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | |
12015 | ||
12016 | We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
12017 | because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
12018 | ||
12019 | *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
12020 | ||
12021 | *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
12022 | You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
12023 | ||
12024 | *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
12025 | conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
12026 | ||
12027 | (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
12028 | ||
12029 | BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
12030 | BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
12031 | ||
12032 | *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
12033 | choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
12034 | restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
12035 | works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
12036 | ||
12037 | *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
12038 | write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
12039 | of the last form. | |
12040 | ||
12041 | *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
12042 | which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
12043 | last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
12044 | as the last form. | |
12045 | ||
12046 | *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
12047 | characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
12048 | matches. | |
12049 | ||
12050 | For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
12051 | ||
12052 | *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
12053 | with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
12054 | Then it returns that string. | |
12055 | ||
12056 | For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
12057 | ||
12058 | (with-output-to-string | |
12059 | (princ "The buffer is ") | |
12060 | (princ (buffer-name))) | |
12061 | ||
12062 | returns "The buffer is foo". | |
12063 | ||
12064 | ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
12065 | is non-nil. | |
12066 | ||
12067 | These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
12068 | buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
12069 | characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
12070 | ||
12071 | *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
12072 | a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
12073 | ||
12074 | Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
12075 | character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
12076 | Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
12077 | position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
12078 | characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
12079 | (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
12080 | ||
12081 | ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
12082 | Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
12083 | non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
12084 | characters". | |
12085 | ||
12086 | The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
12087 | through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
12088 | "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
12089 | range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
12090 | leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
12091 | ||
12092 | *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
12093 | (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
12094 | multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
12095 | character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
12096 | ||
12097 | This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
12098 | always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
12099 | ||
12100 | However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
12101 | ||
12102 | *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | |
12103 | because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
12104 | have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
12105 | the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
12106 | guaranteed. | |
12107 | ||
12108 | *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
12109 | between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
12110 | character). | |
12111 | ||
12112 | When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
12113 | ||
12114 | 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
12115 | 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
12116 | 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
12117 | 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
12118 | 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
12119 | ||
12120 | *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
12121 | ||
12122 | *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
12123 | `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
12124 | more than the number of characters. | |
12125 | ||
12126 | You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
12127 | it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
12128 | \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
12129 | is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
12130 | follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
12131 | newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
12132 | ||
12133 | *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
12134 | and returns a string containing those characters. | |
12135 | ||
12136 | *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
12137 | (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
12138 | counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
12139 | character, sref signals an error. | |
12140 | ||
12141 | *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
12142 | in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
12143 | string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
12144 | ||
12145 | *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
12146 | in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
12147 | region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
12148 | ||
12149 | *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
12150 | the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
12151 | to a vector of the characters in it. | |
12152 | ||
12153 | *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
12154 | of a string. You call it as follows: | |
12155 | ||
12156 | (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
12157 | ||
12158 | This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
12159 | STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
12160 | This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
12161 | Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
12162 | it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
12163 | ||
12164 | *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
12165 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
12166 | ||
12167 | *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
12168 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
12169 | ||
12170 | *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
12171 | to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
12172 | not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
12173 | which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
12174 | ||
12175 | (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
12176 | ||
12177 | This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
12178 | ||
12179 | The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
12180 | If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
12181 | are not included in the resulting value. | |
12182 | ||
12183 | The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
12184 | at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
12185 | WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
12186 | is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
12187 | ||
12188 | If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
12189 | place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
12190 | character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
12191 | PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
12192 | string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
12193 | column START-COLUMN. | |
12194 | ||
12195 | *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
12196 | the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
12197 | necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
12198 | difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
12199 | changed text, before the change. | |
12200 | ||
12201 | *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
12202 | sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
12203 | one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
12204 | ||
12205 | **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
12206 | ||
12207 | **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
12208 | ||
12209 | **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
12210 | set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
12211 | ||
12212 | **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
12213 | name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
12214 | which identify the character within that character set. | |
12215 | ||
12216 | **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
12217 | byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
12218 | opposite of split-char. | |
12219 | ||
12220 | **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
12221 | of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
12222 | ||
12223 | **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
12224 | of all the characters in a string. | |
12225 | ||
12226 | *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
12227 | and specifying coding systems. | |
12228 | ||
12229 | **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
12230 | system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
12231 | of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
12232 | (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
12233 | and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
12234 | as what to do about code conversion.) | |
12235 | ||
12236 | **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
12237 | name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
12238 | ||
12239 | **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
12240 | for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
12241 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
12242 | ||
12243 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
12244 | which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
12245 | to match against a file name. | |
12246 | ||
12247 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
12248 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
12249 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
12250 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
12251 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
12252 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
12253 | ||
12254 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
12255 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
12256 | ||
12257 | **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
12258 | the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
12259 | ||
12260 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
12261 | which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
12262 | either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
12263 | service names. | |
12264 | ||
12265 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
12266 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
12267 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
12268 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
12269 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
12270 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
12271 | ||
12272 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
12273 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
12274 | ||
12275 | **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
12276 | for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
12277 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
12278 | start the subprocess. | |
12279 | ||
12280 | **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
12281 | systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
12282 | when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
12283 | (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
12284 | to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
12285 | ||
12286 | **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
12287 | coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
12288 | subprocess. | |
12289 | ||
12290 | It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
12291 | but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
12292 | start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
12293 | connection permanently or until overridden. | |
12294 | ||
12295 | The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
12296 | file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
12297 | network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
12298 | coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
12299 | It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
12300 | system for one operation at a time. | |
12301 | ||
12302 | **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
12303 | files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
12304 | ||
12305 | **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
12306 | coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
12307 | The value is a cons cell, | |
12308 | (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
12309 | where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
12310 | the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
12311 | input to the subprocess. | |
12312 | ||
12313 | **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
12314 | change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
12315 | ||
12316 | ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
12317 | customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
12318 | you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
12319 | ||
12320 | You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
12321 | variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
12322 | information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
12323 | legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
12324 | customization. | |
12325 | ||
12326 | Thus, instead of writing | |
12327 | ||
12328 | (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
12329 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
12330 | ||
12331 | you would now write this: | |
12332 | ||
12333 | (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
12334 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
12335 | :type 'boolean | |
12336 | :group foo) | |
12337 | ||
12338 | The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
12339 | two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
12340 | describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
12341 | for a description of them. | |
12342 | ||
12343 | The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
12344 | should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
12345 | ||
12346 | (defgroup ispell nil | |
12347 | "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
12348 | :group 'processes) | |
12349 | ||
12350 | The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
12351 | group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
12352 | but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
12353 | to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
12354 | second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
12355 | ||
12356 | Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
12357 | package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
12358 | have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
12359 | package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
12360 | first-level subgroups. | |
12361 | ||
12362 | ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
12363 | ||
12364 | This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
12365 | separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
12366 | ||
12367 | ** easy-mmode | |
12368 | ||
12369 | The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
12370 | developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
12371 | only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
12372 | predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
12373 | `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
12374 | `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
12375 | ||
12376 | ** Text property changes | |
12377 | ||
12378 | *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
12379 | text property. | |
12380 | ||
12381 | *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
12382 | previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
12383 | place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
12384 | functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
12385 | starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
12386 | ||
12387 | If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
12388 | LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
12389 | of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
12390 | position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
12391 | ||
12392 | *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
12393 | value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
12394 | is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
12395 | ||
12396 | ** Changes in invisibility features | |
12397 | ||
12398 | *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
12399 | hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
12400 | is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
12401 | should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
12402 | would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
12403 | make the overlay visible. | |
12404 | ||
12405 | During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
12406 | invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
12407 | needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
12408 | which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
12409 | the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
12410 | t when it should hide it. | |
12411 | ||
12412 | *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
12413 | ||
12414 | Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
12415 | invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | |
12416 | and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
12417 | Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | |
12418 | manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
12419 | Here is an example of how to do this: | |
12420 | ||
12421 | ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
12422 | (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
12423 | ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | |
12424 | (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
12425 | ||
12426 | ... | |
12427 | (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
12428 | ||
12429 | ... | |
12430 | ;; When done with the overlays: | |
12431 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
12432 | ;; Or respectively: | |
12433 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
12434 | ||
12435 | ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
12436 | ||
12437 | *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
12438 | `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
12439 | obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
12440 | `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
12441 | ||
12442 | If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
12443 | is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
12444 | used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
12445 | ||
12446 | When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
12447 | character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
12448 | ||
12449 | a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
12450 | is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
12451 | ||
12452 | Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
12453 | syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
12454 | a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
12455 | ||
12456 | b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
12457 | is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
12458 | (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
12459 | determine the syntax type of the character. | |
12460 | ||
12461 | c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
12462 | of the current buffer. | |
12463 | ||
12464 | *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
12465 | value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
12466 | for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
12467 | ||
12468 | *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
12469 | and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
12470 | only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
12471 | character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
12472 | another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
12473 | ||
12474 | These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
12475 | text property. | |
12476 | ||
12477 | *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
12478 | arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
12479 | of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
12480 | ||
12481 | *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
12482 | (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
12483 | element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
12484 | nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
12485 | string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
12486 | ||
12487 | *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
12488 | syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
12489 | `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
12490 | ||
12491 | ** Changes in face features | |
12492 | ||
12493 | *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
12494 | if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
12495 | ||
12496 | *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
12497 | of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
12498 | ||
12499 | *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
12500 | set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
12501 | ||
12502 | *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
12503 | set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
12504 | ||
12505 | *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
12506 | by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
12507 | and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
12508 | the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
12509 | overlay property). | |
12510 | ||
12511 | This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
12512 | arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
12513 | ||
12514 | ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
12515 | ||
12516 | *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
12517 | directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
12518 | they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
12519 | is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
12520 | ||
12521 | This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
12522 | begins with ~. | |
12523 | ||
12524 | *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
12525 | it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
12526 | ||
12527 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
12528 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
12529 | ||
12530 | *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
12531 | as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
12532 | ||
12533 | *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
12534 | character code conversion as well as other things. | |
12535 | ||
12536 | Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
12537 | (formerly it did not). | |
12538 | ||
12539 | *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
12540 | environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
12541 | ||
12542 | *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
12543 | instead of constant strings. | |
12544 | ||
12545 | *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
12546 | to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
12547 | any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
12548 | ||
12549 | substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
12550 | in the same way as before. | |
12551 | ||
12552 | *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
12553 | The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
12554 | which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
12555 | ||
12556 | *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
12557 | error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
12558 | else, and returns nil. | |
12559 | ||
12560 | *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
12561 | directory cannot be listed. | |
12562 | ||
12563 | ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
12564 | ||
12565 | *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
12566 | read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
12567 | additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
12568 | argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
12569 | ways: | |
12570 | ||
12571 | It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
12572 | It is available through the history command M-n. | |
12573 | ||
12574 | *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
12575 | read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
12576 | argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
12577 | minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
12578 | enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
12579 | ||
12580 | In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
12581 | argument in this way. | |
12582 | ||
12583 | *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
12584 | from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
12585 | minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
12586 | ||
12587 | ** Echo area features | |
12588 | ||
12589 | *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
12590 | echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
12591 | minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
12592 | after the echo area is cleared. | |
12593 | ||
12594 | *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
12595 | in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
12596 | ||
12597 | ** Keyboard input features | |
12598 | ||
12599 | *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
12600 | set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
12601 | ||
12602 | *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
12603 | received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
12604 | by keyboard macros. | |
12605 | ||
12606 | ** Frame-related changes | |
12607 | ||
12608 | *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
12609 | creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
12610 | hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
12611 | ||
12612 | *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
12613 | the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
12614 | has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
12615 | ||
12616 | *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
12617 | selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
12618 | value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
12619 | in the selected frame. | |
12620 | ||
12621 | *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
12622 | is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
12623 | which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
12624 | ||
12625 | ** X Windows features | |
12626 | ||
12627 | *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
12628 | x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
12629 | x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
12630 | ||
12631 | *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
12632 | The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
12633 | ||
12634 | *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
12635 | MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
12636 | A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
12637 | ||
12638 | If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
12639 | it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
12640 | ||
12641 | ** Subprocess features | |
12642 | ||
12643 | *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
12644 | functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
12645 | automatically. | |
12646 | ||
12647 | *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
12648 | and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
12649 | ||
12650 | *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
12651 | and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
12652 | ||
12653 | ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
12654 | does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
12655 | ||
12656 | ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
12657 | at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
12658 | goes after the other menu items. | |
12659 | ||
12660 | ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
12661 | of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | |
12662 | around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | |
12663 | are in use. | |
12664 | ||
12665 | The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
12666 | series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
12667 | ||
12668 | Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
12669 | after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
12670 | form. | |
12671 | ||
12672 | ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
12673 | is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
12674 | but its hook is still run. | |
12675 | ||
12676 | ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
12677 | for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
12678 | ||
12679 | If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
12680 | regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
12681 | useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
12682 | ||
12683 | This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
12684 | are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
12685 | filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
12686 | warned. | |
12687 | ||
12688 | ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
12689 | way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
12690 | ||
12691 | ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
12692 | integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
12693 | functions like display-time. | |
12694 | ||
12695 | ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
12696 | name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
12697 | ||
12698 | ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
12699 | can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
12700 | is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
12701 | ||
12702 | ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
12703 | if there is an error in compilation. | |
12704 | ||
12705 | ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
12706 | switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
12707 | argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
12708 | they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
12709 | ||
12710 | ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
12711 | Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
12712 | the *scratch* buffer. | |
12713 | ||
12714 | ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
12715 | The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
12716 | where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
12717 | e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
12718 | ||
12719 | ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
12720 | and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
12721 | It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
12722 | ||
12723 | ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
12724 | using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
12725 | variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
12726 | and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
12727 | ||
12728 | ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
12729 | can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
12730 | full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
12731 | ||
12732 | ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
12733 | of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
12734 | where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
12735 | in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
12736 | option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
12737 | files at all. | |
12738 | ||
12739 | ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
12740 | and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
12741 | width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
12742 | the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
12743 | ||
12744 | For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
12745 | minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
12746 | with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
12747 | is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
12748 | ||
12749 | ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
12750 | ||
12751 | ** imenu.el changes. | |
12752 | ||
12753 | You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
12754 | item from menu created by imenu. | |
12755 | ||
12756 | An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
12757 | #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
12758 | select one of those items. | |
05197f40 | 12759 | \f |
3787e12e | 12760 | * For older news, see the file ONEWS |
a933dad1 DL |
12761 | |
12762 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
12763 | Copyright information: | |
12764 | ||
175573ac | 12765 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
a933dad1 DL |
12766 | |
12767 | Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
12768 | of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
12769 | copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
12770 | thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
12771 | ||
12772 | Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
12773 | of this document, or of portions of it, | |
12774 | under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
12775 | carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
05197f40 | 12776 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
12777 | Local variables: |
12778 | mode: outline | |
12779 | paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$" | |
12780 | end: | |
6b61353c KH |
12781 | |
12782 | arch-tag: 1aca9dfa-2ac4-4d14-bebf-0007cee12793 |